Anda di halaman 1dari 338

Trimble Geomatics Office

User Guide
Volume 1
Trimble Geomatics Office
User Guide
Volume 1

Version 1.5
Part Number 39328-10-ENG
Revision A
January 2001
Corporate Office Patents

Trimble Navigation Limited The Trimble Geomatics Office software is


Technical Publications Group covered by the following U.S. patents: 5614913,
645 North Mary Avenue 5969708, 5986604, and other patents pending.
Post Office Box 3642
Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642 The following limited warranties give you specific
U.S.A. legal rights. You may have others, which vary
Phone: +1-408-481-8940, 1-800-545-7762 from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.
Fax: +1-408-481-7744
www.trimble.com Software and Firmware Limited Warranty
Copyright and Trademarks Trimble warrants that this Trimble software
product (the Software) shall substantially
19992001, Trimble Navigation Limited. All conform to Trimbles applicable published
rights reserved. For STL support, the Trimble specifications for the Software for a period of
Geomatics Office software uses the Moscow ninety (90) days, starting from the date of
Center for SPARC Technology adaptation of the delivery.
SGI Standard Template Library. Copyright
1994 Hewlett-Packard Company, Copyright Warranty Remedies
1996, 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems,
Inc., Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy
SPARC Technology. Printed in the United States under the warranties set forth above shall be, at
of America, on recycled paper. Trimbles option, to repair or replace any Product
or Software that fails to conform to such warranty
The Sextant logo with Trimble, and GPS (Nonconforming Product) or refund the
Pathfinder, are trademarks of Trimble Navigation purchase price paid by you for any such
Limited, registered in the United States Patent and Nonconforming Product, upon your return of any
Trademark Office. Nonconforming Product to Trimble.
The Globe & Triangle logo with Trimble, Convert
to RINEX, Coordinate System Manager, Data
Dictionary Editor, DC File Editor, DTMLink,
Feature and Attribute Editor, Grid Factory,
GPSurvey, Line Type Editor, QuickPlan,
RoadLink, Symbol Editor, Trimble Geomatics
Office, Trimble Survey Controller, Trimble
Survey Office, TRIMMAP, TRIMNET, TSC1,
and WAVE are trademarks of Trimble Navigation
Limited.

All other trademarks are the property of their


respective owners.

Release Notice

This is the January 2001 release (Revision A) of


Volume 1 of the Trimble Geomatics Office User
Guide, part number 39328-10-ENG. It applies to
version 1.5 of the Trimble Geomatics Office
software.
Warranty Exclusions Limitation of Liability

These warranties shall be applied only in the event TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
and to the extent that: (i) the Products and APPLICABLE LAW, TRIMBLE SHALL NOT BE
Software are properly and correctly installed, LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
configured, interfaced, stored, maintained and OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
operated in accordance with Trimbles relevant OR UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL
operators manual and specifications, and; (ii) the THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE
Products and Software are not modified or PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE, REGARDLESS
misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for, any THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND
claim of warranty infringement is based on (i) REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING
defects or performance problems that arise from WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED
the combination or utilization of the Product or BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME
Software with products, information, systems or STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
devices not made, supplied or specified by THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
Software under any specification other than, or in DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
addition to, Trimbles standard specifications for APPLY TO YOU.
its products; (iii) the unauthorized modification or
use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage IN ANY CASE, TRIMBLES SOLE LIABILITY,
caused by lightning, other electrical discharge, or AND YOUR SOLE REMEDY UNDER OR FOR
fresh or salt water immersion or spray; or (v) BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT, WILL BE
normal wear and tear on consumable parts (e.g., LIMITED TO THE REFUND OF THE PURCHASE
batteries). PRICE OR LICENSE FEE PAID FOR THE
PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE.
THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLES
ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDIES PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS
AND SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT, TRIMBLE
FURNISHES THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE
AS-IS, WITH NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, AND THERE IS EXPRESSLY
EXCLUDED THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE STATED EXPRESS
WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL
OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART
OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF, OR IN
CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR
SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS
ON DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, SO
THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
Contents
Please See Volume 2 for Chapters 1117
and Appendixes AB

About This Manual


Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Your Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxii

1 Introduction
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Key Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Trimble Geomatics Office Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Folder Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Starting the Trimble Geomatics Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
The Trimble Geomatics Office Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
The Project Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
The Survey View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
The Plan View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 v


Contents

ToolTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Exiting the Trimble Geomatics Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

3 Setting up a Project
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Opening an Existing Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Changing the Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Changing the Project Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting a Coordinate System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selecting the Project Units and Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Setting up a Project for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Changing the Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Changing the Recomputation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Deleting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Copying a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using Project Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting a Template for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Creating a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

4 Using a Coordinate System


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
The Coordinate System Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using Geoid Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Geoid Grid (*.ggf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using a Geoid Model to Determine the Elevation for
GPS Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting a Geoid Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Viewing the Current Coordinate System Details . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

vi Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Contents

Changing the Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45


Selecting a Coordinate System from the Coordinate System
wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Selecting a Coordinate System in a Survey Controller (*.dc) File 52
Using a Scale Factor-Only Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . 54
Using a Default Transverse Mercator Projection . . . . . . . . 55
Saving the Current Coordinate System as a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Ground Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Entering Project Location Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Setting the Ground Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office


Software
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Importing ASCII Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using Custom ASCII Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Events That May Occur When Importing Data Files . . . . . . . . . . 69
Managing Duplicate Points When Importing Data . . . . . . . 70
Resolving Duplicate Points in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Import Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
The Project Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
The Messages Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
The Recompute Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Example: Importing a PacSoft File Containing Control Points. . . . . 75

6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Transferring Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Survey Controller (*.dc) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Geoid Grid (*.ggf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Subgridding a Geoid Grid (*.ggf) File from an Existing Geoid
Grid File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Transferring an Existing Geoid Grid (*.ggf) File . . . . . . . . 88

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 vii


Contents

Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89


Creating a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) File . . . . . . . . . 89
Transferring an Existing Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) File . . 94
Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Data Dictionary (*.ddf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Antenna Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
UK National Grid Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office


Software
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Importing Survey Controller (*.dc) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Importing .dc Files from the Trimble Survey Controller
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Importing .dc Files on Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Events That May Occur When Importing .dc Files . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import . . . . 112
Trimble Survey Controller Classes and How They
Are Imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Qualities Assigned to Coordinates from the Trimble
Survey Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Qualities Assigned to Observations from the Trimble
Survey Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Managing Duplicate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Importing Trimble GPS Data (*.dat) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Importing .dat Files from the Trimble Survey Controller
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Importing .dat Files from a Trimble GPS Receiver . . . . . . . 119
Importing .dat Files from Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

vi ii Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Contents

Events That May Occur When Importing .dat Files . . . . . . . . . . 125


Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import . . . . 125
How the Trimble Geomatics Office Software Assigns Qualities
to Imported Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Managing Points with Duplicate Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Importing RINEX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Importing NGS Data Sheet Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Importing Digital Level Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Digital Level Import Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Editing Starting Point Elevations Before Importing . . . . . . . 134
Import Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
The Project Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
The Messages Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
The Recompute Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Graphics Window to
View a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Using the Zoom Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Labeling Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Using View Filters in the Survey View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Viewing Survey Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Viewing Grid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Setting the Color Scheme in the Graphics Window . . . . . . . 148
Viewing Background Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Selecting Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Selecting All or None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Selecting Entities Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Selecting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Selecting Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Selecting Duplicate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Selecting Staked Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 ix


Contents

Selecting Calibration Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163


Selecting Entities in the Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Selecting Entities Using Wildcards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Selecting Entities Using Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Using Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

9 Viewing and Editing Data


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Properties Window Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Viewing Survey Data in the Properties window . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Using Pages to View Survey Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Viewing and Editing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Viewing Survey Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Point Quality Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Viewing the Point Derivation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Entering Coordinates for a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Viewing Stakeout Information for a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Viewing CAD Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Renaming Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Viewing Observations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
GPS Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Conventional Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Level Observations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Laser Rangefinder Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Azimuth Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Reduced Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Viewing Erroneous Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
GPS Loop Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Editing Survey Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Changing the Status of Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Reversing the Direction of Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

x Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Contents

Editing Multiple Entities at One Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209


Editing the Survey-Related Properties of Selected Entities . . . 211
Editing the CAD-Related Properties of Selected Entities . . . . 213
Using the Data Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Viewing the Inverse Between Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Measuring Positions Within the Graphics Window . . . . . . . 217
Viewing Note Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Viewing CAD Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Linework (Lines, Arcs, Curves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

10 GPS Site Calibration


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Selecting the Calibration Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Computing a Datum Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Updating Default Projection Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Computing a Horizontal Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Computing a Vertical Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Selecting the Calibration Point Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Selecting Calibration Point Pairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Computing the Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Analyzing the Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Viewing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Calibration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Applying the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Using a GPS Site Calibration in Future Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 xi


Contents

11 Feature Code Processing


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Feature and Attribute Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Transferring a Feature and Attribute Library to the Trimble
Survey Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Transferring the Survey Controller (*.dc) File to a Trimble
Geomatics Office Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Processing Feature Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Undoing Feature Code Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
The Feature Code Processing Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

12 Using the Plan View


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Selecting Entities in a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Creating New Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Editing Existing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Deleting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Creating Layers Using the Feature and Attribute Editor Utility . 326
CAD Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Creating CAD Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Editing Existing CAD Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Deleting CAD Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Creating CAD Styles Using the Feature and Attribute
Editor Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Creating Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Editing Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Deleting Annotation Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating Annotation Templates Using the Feature and
Attribute Editor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

xi i Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Contents

13 Adding Entities to the Project


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Adding Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Adding Points by Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Adding Points by Azimuth and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Adding and Editing Azimuth Observations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Adding Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Adding Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Adding Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Adding Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Adding Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Adding Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Cutting, or Copying, and Pasting Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

14 Reporting on the Project


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Additional Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Points Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Stakeout Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Level Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Report Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

15 Exporting to Third-Party Software Formats


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Export Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Exporting to a Third-Party Software Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Exporting NGS Bluebook Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Exporting Using the Trimble Data Exchange Format . . . . . . . . . 374

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 xi ii


Contents

16 Using Attributes in the Trimble Geomatics Office Software


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Defining Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Setting up a Project for Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Exporting a Feature and Attribute Library to the Trimble Survey
Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Collecting Attribute Information in the Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Importing a Data Collector (*.dc) File Containing Attributes . . . . . 384
Using Data Dictionary (*.ddf) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Using Data Dictionary (*.ddf) Files for Defining Attributes . . 385
Setting up a Project for Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Exporting a Data Dictionary (*.ddf) File to the Trimble Survey
Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Managing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Viewing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Editing Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Adding Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Deleting Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Cutting, or Copying, and Pasting Points with Attributes . . . . . . . . 389
Reporting Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Creating a Custom Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Selecting Points to Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Running the Custom Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Exporting Attributes to an ASCII Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Exporting Features and Attributes to a Geographic Information
System (GIS) Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
GIS Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Exporting Data to a GIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

xi v Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Contents

17 Utilities
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Trimble Data Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Using the Data Transfer Utility from the Trimble Geomatics
Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Using the Standalone Data Transfer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Setting Up Devices Using the Data Transfer Utility . . . . . . . 402
Managing Your Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Coordinate System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
When to Use the Coordinate System Manager Utility . . . . . . 410
Using the Coordinate System Manager Utility . . . . . . . . . 411
Using the Coordinate System Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Symbol Editor and Line Type Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
When to Use the Symbol Editor or the Line Type Editor
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Using the Symbol Editor and Line Type Editor Utilities . . . . 421
Using Symbols and Line Types in the Trimble Geomatics
Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Feature and Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
When to Use the Feature and Attribute Editor Utility . . . . . . 425
Using the Feature and Attribute Editor Utility . . . . . . . . . . 426
Using a Feature and Attribute Library in the Trimble
Geomatics Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
DC File Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
When to Use the DC File Editor Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
QuickPlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
When to Use the QuickPlan Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Before Using the QuickPlan Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Using the QuickPlan Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Exiting the QuickPlan Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Convert to RINEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
When to Use the Convert to RINEX Utility . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Selecting Folders and Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 xv


Contents

Configuring the RINEX Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457


Using the Header Field Override Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Using the Controls Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Creating the RINEX Conversion File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
A1 Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Files Supported by the A1 Viewer Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Grid Factory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
NGS Antenna Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

A Custom Import, Export, and Report Formats


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Other Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Custom Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Format Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Format Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Format Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Custom Format Definition Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Creating an Export Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

xv i Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Contents

B Recomputation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
How a Recomputation Determines the Calculated Positions for
Observed Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
How a Recomputation Determines Potential Starting Points . . 487
How a Recomputation Determines the Position and Quality
for all Potential Starting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
How a Recomputation Uses the Component Qualities to
Determine the Current Starting Point . . . . . . . . . . . 492
How a Recomputation Applies Observations from the
Current Starting Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
GPS Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Conventional and Laser Rangefinder Observations . . . . . . . 496
How Delta Elevations are Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
An Example of a Recomputation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
How a Recomputation Uses Multiple Observations and Coordinates
for a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Multiple Observations to a Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Multiple Observations to Sideshot Points . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Multiple Observations and Meaning Coordinates . . . . . . . . 504
Multiple Observations to Traverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Points with Keyed-in Coordinates and Observations . . . . . . 509
How a Recomputation Determines the Quality of Observed Points . . 510
Autonomous Base Position for Real-Time Kinematic Surveys . 511
Points Moved or Adjusted Using the Trimble Geomatics Office
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Project Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 x vii


Contents

Using the Recompute Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513


The Project Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
The Errors and Warnings Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
The Point Derivations Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
The Starting Points Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
The Traverse Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
The Survey Data Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Glossary

Index

xv iii Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


About This Manual
Welcome to the Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide. This manual
describes how to install, set up, and use the Trimble Geomatics Office
software. The Trimble Geomatics Office software lets you process
the fieldwork from the Trimble Survey Controller software.
Even if you have used other Global Positioning System (GPS)
products before, Trimble recommends that you spend some time
reading this manual to learn about the special features of this product.
If you are not familiar with GPS, visit our web site for an interactive
look at Trimble and GPS at:
www.trimble.com
Trimble assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Windows and
know how to use a mouse, select options from menus and dialogs,
make selections from lists, and refer to online help.
The following sections provide you with a guide to this manual, as
well as to other documentation that you may have received with this
product.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 xix


About This Manual

Related Information
Other manuals in this set include:
Trimble Geomatics Office DTMLink User Guide
This manual describes how to set up and use the DTMLink
software. This software is a powerful tool for creating new
surfaces and editing previously created surfaces.
Trimble Geomatics Office RoadLink User Guide
This manual introduces you to the RoadLink software. The
RoadLink software is part of the Trimble Geomatics Office
software. It is a powerful reduction and processing package that
calculates cut and fill volumes for earthworks between the road
design and the Contour Surface Model.
Trimble Geomatics Office WAVE Baseline Processing User
Guide
This manual describes how to set up and use the WAVE
Baseline Processing module, if you have this module installed.
This module lets you process raw GPS field data collected using
static, FastStatic, or kinematic survey techniques.
Trimble Geomatics Office Network Adjustment User Guide
This manual describes how to set up and use the Trimble
Network Adjustment module, if you have this module installed.
This module lets you adjust your GPS survey data to estimate
and reduce the inherent errors.
As well as being supplied in hardcopy, these manuals are also
available in portable document format (PDF). These are available on
the Trimble Geomatics Office CD.
Other sources of related information are:
Help the software has built-in, context-sensitive help that lets
you quickly find the information you need. You can access it
from the Help menu, by clicking the Help button in a dialog, or
by pressing >)@.

xx Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


About This Manual

Release notes the release notes describe new features of the


product, information not included in the manuals, and any
changes to the manuals. They are provided as a PDF file on the
CD. Use Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the contents of the
release notes.
ftp.trimble.com use the Trimble FTP site to send files or to
receive files such as software patches, utilities, service
bulletins, and FAQs. Alternatively, access the FTP site from the
Trimble web site at www.trimble.com/support/support.htm.
Trimble training courses consider a training course to help
you use your GPS system to its fullest potential. For more
information, visit the Trimble web site at
www.trimble.com/support/training.htm.

Technical Assistance
If you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the
product documentation, contact your local Distributor. Alternatively,
do one of the following:
Request technical support using the Trimble web site at
www.trimble.com/support/support.htm
Send an e-mail to trimble_support@trimble.com.

Your Comments
Your feedback about the supporting documentation helps us to
improve it with each revision. To forward your comments, do one of
the following:
Send an e-mail to ReaderFeedback@trimble.com.
Complete the Reader Comment Form at the back of this manual
and mail it according to the instructions at the bottom of the
form.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 xxi


About This Manual

If the reader comment form is not available, send comments and


suggestions to the address in the front of this manual. Please mark it
Attention: Technical Publications Group.

Document Conventions
The document conventions are as follows:

Convention Definition
Italics Identifies software menus, menu commands,
dialog boxes, and the dialog box fields.
Helvetica Narrow Represents messages printed on the screen.

Helvetica Bold Identifies a software command button, or


represents information that you must type in a
software screen or window.
Select Italics / Italics Identifies the sequence of menus, commands, or
dialog boxes that you must choose in order to
reach a given screen.
>&WUO@ Is an example of a hardware function key that you
must press on a personal computer (PC). If you
must press more than one of these at the same
time, this is represented by a plus sign, for
example, >&WUO@+>&@.

xx ii Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

1
1 Introduction
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Key features
Q Using the software
Q Getting started
Q Folder structure
1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction
Welcome to the Trimble Geomatics Office software from Trimble
Navigation Limited.
Geomatics is the design, collection, storage, analysis, display, and
retrieval of spatial information. The collection of spatial information
can be from a variety of sources, including GPS and terrestrial
methods. Geomatics integrates traditional surveying with new
technology-driven approaches, making geomatics useful for a vast
number of applications.
The Trimble Geomatics Office software is a link and survey reduction
package. It provides a seamless link between your field work and
design software. The software includes an extensive feature set which
helps you to verify your field work quickly, and easily perform
survey-related tasks and export your data to a third-party design
package.
The Trimble Geomatics Office software integrates the functionality
offered in both the Trimble Survey Office and GPSurvey
software.

1.2 Key Features


Some of the key features of the Trimble Geomatics Office version 1.5
software are as follows:
An integrated WAVE baseline processing module
An integrated raw GPS data editor for investigating GPS data
A Windows-based network adjustment module for GPS and
terrestrial data
Two project viewsSurvey and Planfor displaying data
A project bar in the main graphics window which provides
shortcuts to frequently performed tasks
HTML reports for easier review and interpretation of data

2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Introduction 1

Enhanced, seamless transfer of data collected from GPS


receivers, conventional total stations, levels, and laser
rangefinders.
A Properties window with which to view and edit information
for points and observation types
Extensive project selecting, viewing, and editing functions that
allow users to filter out observation types for analysis
Layer support to help manage data
Extensive import and export formats for transfer of data from a
variety of sources
GIS data collection support for expanding high-accuracy GIS
data collection capabilities, and allowing use of data dictionary
files, including files created in the GPS Pathfinder Office
software
RoadLink and DTMLink modules for viewing and editing
third-party road design files, and creating digital terrain models

1.3 Using the Software


Use the Trimble Geomatics Office software for tasks such as:
GPS baseline processing (if you have the WAVE Baseline
Processing module installed)
Survey network adjustment (if you have the Network
Adjustment module installed)
The processing of GPS and conventional topographic survey
data
Quality assurance and quality control of data (QA/QC)
Road design data import and export
Survey data import and export
Digital terrain modeling and contouring

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 3


1 Introduction

Datum transformation and projections


GIS data capture and data export
Feature code processing
Project reporting
Survey project management

 Warning The Trimble Geomatics Office software stores its data in a


Microsoft Access version 9.0 database (filename TGO_V150.mdb in the
Project folder). Microsoft Access 2000 uses version 9.0 database. Trimble
Navigation Limited reserves the right to modify the structure of the
database at any time. This may affect users who develop applications to
interact directly with the Access database.

Figure 1.1 on the next page shows the typical workflow for a project,
and where in the manual set to find the instructions for each task.

4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Introduction 1

*All Set up project and select coordinate system - *chapters 3 & 4


chapters
refer to the
Import data files - chapter 5
Trimble
Geomatics
Office User Transfer files to the Trimble Survey Controller software
Guide for fieldwork - chapter 6
unless
otherwise
noted. Complete fieldwork

Transfer fieldwork files - chapter 7

Check and edit observations - chapters 8 & 9

Process GPS baselines -


WAVE Baseline Processing
User Guide - chapter 2

View raw GPS data using Timeline - Perform a Network


WAVE Baseline Processing Adjustment - Network Adjustment
User Guide - chapter 5 User Guide - chapter 2

Perform a GPS site calibration - chapter 10

Process feature codes - chapter 11

Edit the project in the Plan view - chapters 12 & 13

Produce database reports - chapter 14

Export to a third-party format - chapter 15

Figure 1.1 Project workflow and manual structure

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 5


1 Introduction

1.4 Getting Started


Trimble recommends that, before you get started, you read this
chapter. This will help you to get the most out of the Trimble
Geomatics Office software. After reading this chapter and installing
the software, work through Chapter 2, Using the Trimble Geomatics
Office Software, and Chapter 3, Setting up a Project.
The remaining chapters describe the extended functionality of the
Trimble Geomatics Office software.

1.4.1 Trimble Geomatics Office Help


The Trimble Geomatics Office software and its accompanying utilities
include extensive online help. Become familiar with the relevant
sections in the manual before starting, and then use the Help for in-
depth answers to any questions.

Printing Help topics


To print the current Help topic, do one of the following:
Click Print.
Select File / Print Topic.
In the Help window, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and
then select Print Topic.
Note You can only print individual topics.
To print information in a pop-up window:
In the pop-up window, right-click to access the shortcut menu,
and then select Print Topic.

6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Introduction 1

1.5 Folder Structure


During the installation process, all files required by the Trimble
Geomatics Office software are copied into the folders listed in
Table 1.1.
Table 1.1 Location of files

Folder What it stores


\Program Trimble Geomatics Office Program and Help
Files\Trimble\Trimble files
Geomatics Office
...\System System files; including the Feature and
Attribute Library software files, Symbol
Editor and Line Type Editor utilities, and
HTML report templates
...\Template Project template files
...\Utility Links to Convert to RINEX, Coordinate
System Manager, Data Transfer, DC File
Editor, Feature and Attribute Editor, Line
Type Editor, QuickPlan, and Symbol Editor
utilities
...\RoadLink DTMLink Program files and associated files for
RoadLink and DTMLink
\Program Files used by other Trimble products in
Files\Common Files\ addition to the Trimble Geomatics Office
Trimble software
...\GeoData Coordinate system information and Geoid
files
...\GeoDB Coordinate System Manager program files
...\Data Transfer Data Transfer program files
...\DatToRinex Convert to RINEX program files
...\DCeditor DC File Editor program files
...\Plan QuickPlan program files

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 7


1 Introduction

8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

2
2 Using the Trimble Geomatics
Office Software
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Starting the Trimble Geomatics Office software
Q The Trimble Geomatics Office window
Q The Survey view
Q The Plan view
Q ToolTips
Q Shortcut menus
Q Pointers
Q Exiting the Trimble Geomatics Office software
2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2.1 Introduction
This chapter shows you how to start the software and how to use the
two views included in the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics
windowthe main screen of the software. For information about how
to use the various tools and icons in the graphics window, see
Chapter 8, Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities.

2.2 Starting the Trimble Geomatics Office Software


To start the Trimble Geomatics Office software:
Click and then select Programs / Trimble Geomatics
Office / Trimble Geomatics Office.
The Trimble Geomatics Office window appears.

2.3 The Trimble Geomatics Office Window


The Trimble Geomatics Office window includes the main graphics
window (which displays project data), menus, and toolbars.
There are two viewsSurvey and Plan. In each view the available
menus, menu commands, and toolbars are different.
To switch between the Survey and Plan views, do one of the
following:
In the toolbar, select the Survey View tool or the Plan View
tool.
Select View / Survey or View / Plan.
For more information, see The Survey View, page 15 and The Plan
View, page 19. For information about the different menus, menu
commands, and toolbars, refer to the Help.
Figure 2.1 shows the parts of the Trimble Geomatics Office window
that are common to both views. The following sections describe the
different parts of the Trimble Geomatics Office window.

10 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1
Menu commands Project name System buttons

Toolbars

Project
bar
Graphics
window

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software


Zoom navigator window Status bar Window corner

Figure 2.1 Parts of the graphics window common to both views


11

2
2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2.3.1 The Project Bar


The project bar is located on the left side of the Trimble Geomatics
Office window. It contains named groups (for example, the Trimble
Survey group) that list shortcuts to commonly performed tasks. These
groups follow a general work flow.
Figure 2.2 shows the parts of the project bar. You can click the
drop-down arrow to show the rest of the shortcuts in a group. Click a
shortcut to perform a task. For example, click the Survey Device
shortcut to transfer data from a device to the Trimble Geomatics
Office project.

Trimble survey
shortcuts

Drop-down
arrow

Other groups

Figure 2.2 Items in the project bar

12 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

To show or hide the project bar, do one of the following:


In the toolbar, click the Project Bar icon.
Select View / Project Bar.
When there is no project open, the Projects and Utilities groups are
available. When a project is open, only the Utilities group is
unavailable.

The zoom navigator


The zoom navigator is a small window located at the bottom of the
project bar. It reflects the data displayed in the main Trimble
Geomatics Office graphics window. If you use any of the zoom tools
in the main window, the zoom navigator changes to reflect this. It is a
convenient display of the extents of your project.
You can show or hide the zoom navigator within the project bar. To do
this:
In the project bar, right-click to access the shortcut menu and
then select Zoom Navigator.
To use the zoom navigator:
Click an area of the project in the zoom navigator. This area
becomes the center of the main graphics window.
To use the zoom navigator to zoom:
In the zoom navigator, drag a box around the area of interest.
The main graphics window displays the same data.
When you point to the middle of the box in the zoom navigator, the
pointer becomes a . This means that you can drag the box over the
project area without changing the zoom. The view of the project in the
main graphics window reflects these movements.

 Tip If you have a mouse with a wheel, you can use the wheel to change
the size of the zoom navigator box.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 13


2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2.3.2 The Status Bar


The status bar is located at the bottom of the Trimble Geomatics
Office graphics window (see Figure 2.1, page 11). It displays icons
that show the current status of the project. To perform the action
indicated by an icon, double-click it. Table 2.1 shows the icons that are
displayed in the status bar.
Table 2.1 Icons in the status bar

Icon View Is displayed when ...


Recompute Both a recomputation is required to update the coordinates for points
fixed by GPS and terrestrial observations. To perform a
recomputation, double-click this icon.
Flag Survey there is a misclosure between two or more observations to the
same point, or a GPS observation has failed the rejection
criteria. To select all of the points and observations which are
flagged, double-click this icon. The Properties window opens.
You can view the points and observations. If you suppress a
flag for a point or an observation, the flag is white.
Hidden Layers Plan one or more layers have their Visible property set to false. To
edit the Visible property of layers, double-click this icon. The
Layers dialog appears.
Locked Layers Plan one or more layers have their Locked property set to true. To
edit the Locked property of layers, double-click this icon. The
Layers dialog appears.
View Filters Survey one or more view filters are applied. To edit the view filters,
double-click this icon. The View Filters dialog appears.

Grid Line Both grid lines are displayed. The grid interval is also shown.

Graphics Window Both the mouse is outside of the graphics window.


Dimension

14 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

2.4 The Survey View


In the Survey view, GPS and terrestrial observations are displayed as
colored lines. Control points and network adjusted points also have
special displays. For information about each color and the status it
represents, see Setting the Color Scheme in the Graphics Window,
page 148.
If the Trimble Geomatics Office software finds any problematic
observations (for example, a misclosure outside the tolerance
specified in the Horizontal or Vertical fields of the Recompute tab in
the Project Properties dialog), error flags appear at the point where the
misclosure occurs. Use the Survey view to perform survey-related
tasks such as:
checking GPS and conventional observations
correcting erroneous data (for more information, see Chapter 9,
Viewing and Editing Data)
GPS processing (if you have the WAVE Baseline Processing
module installed)
GPS site calibration
GPS loop closures
inverse calculations
Network Adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment
module installed)
For more information about these menus, menu commands, and
toolbars, refer to the topic Survey View Overview in the Help.
Figure 2.3, on the following page, shows a project in the Survey view.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 15


2

16
Properties window

RTK
vectors
Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Error Terrestrial
flag observations

Figure 2.3 A project in the Survey view

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

2.4.1 Other Modules


With the Trimble Geomatics Office software you can install the
modules discussed in the following sections.

WAVE Baseline Processing module


Table 2.2 shows the functionality that is available in the Trimble
Geomatics Office WAVE Baseline Processing module.
Table 2.2 The WAVE Baseline Processing module

Name Use
WAVE Baseline processor To process raw GPS observations,
(available from the Survey menu or including kinematic, continuous
the project bar) kinematic, static/FastStatic and infill
data.
WAVE processing styles To specify different processing controls
for the WAVE baseline processor, and
to save the control sets as named
styles.
Timeline window To view and edit raw GPS
measurements and survey information.
Displays GPS data in a chronological
view. The close integration of the
Timeline window with the graphics
window makes this a powerful quality
control tool.
GPS Baseline Processing Report To display detailed information about
(HTML) postprocessed baseline solutions.
These reports are available both during
processing and also later from the
Reports menu.
Process group in the project bar For quick access to commonly used
baseline processing tasks.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 17


2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Network Adjustment module


Table 2.3 shows the functionality that is available in the Trimble
Geomatics Office Network Adjustment module.
Table 2.3 The Network Adjustment module

Name Use
Network Adjustment To adjust your GPS and terrestrial networks,
(available from the analyze the results, edit the network
Adjustment menu or the parameters, and readjust.
project bar).
Allowing you to fix points,
load observations for
Network Adjustment,
determine observation
outliers, and weight the
observation errors.
Network Adjustment styles To specify different adjustment controls for the
Network Adjustment software, and to save the
control sets as named styles.
Network Adjustment Report To review the results of the adjustment and
(HTML) perform quality control checks.
Adjustment group in project For quick access to commonly-used network
bar adjustment processing tasks.
Ellipse Controls toolbar To configure the appearance of error ellipses in
the graphics window after a network
adjustment.

18 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

2.5 The Plan View


In the Plan view, entities are displayed according to the style given to
them, so use the Plan view to view the topographic features observed
during the field survey. You can add entitiespoints, lines, arcs,
curves, text styles, and annotationsto the project.
You can change the style of an entity by using the Properties window
or the Multiple Edit dialog, or by processing feature codes. Any
changes that you make do not affect the underlying survey
observations.
Use the Plan view to prepare a topographic survey for export to your
design software package. You can do the following:
process feature codes
manage layers and styles
access the DTMLink and RoadLink software
For more information, refer to the topic Plan View Overview in the
Help. Figure 2.4, on the following page, shows a project in the Plan
view.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 19


20

2
Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software
Annotation
Layers toolbar CAD toolbar

Properties
window
Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1

Line style

Point style

Figure 2.4 A project in the Plan view


Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 2

2.6 ToolTips
ToolTips are a quick way to learn about, or recall the function of, a
button, box, or tool. They also provide useful information about
entities in the graphics window. To use ToolTips:
Position the pointer over a button, box, or tool in the toolbar; or
an entity (observation, point, line, arc, curve, text, or
annotation) in the graphics window.
After a few seconds, a small pop-up window appears and
identifies the item. This is a ToolTip.
For example, when you position the pointer over the Import tool in the
standard toolbar, the following ToolTip appears:

For more information about what each tool does, refer to the Help.

2.7 Shortcut Menus


Shortcut menus are context-sensitive menus with commands that vary
depending on where you position the pointer.
You can use shortcut menus for common tasks such as:
accessing commonly-used menu commands and dialogs
toggling display settings
inserting field codes
To access a shortcut menu:
1. In the appropriate area, click the right mouse button
(right-click). A shortcut menu appears.
2. Select the appropriate menu command.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 21


2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2.8 Pointers
When you use a mouse, you use a pointer to select objects and choose
menu commands. This pointer changes shape according to its position,
the mode you are in (for example, the Select or Field fill-in modes), or
the tool that has been selected. Table 2.4 shows some pointers.
Table 2.4 Pointer shapes

Pointer Use
When it is in the graphics window in Select mode, or when it
is to be used for selecting menu items or toolbar icons.

When it is over a text boxused for inserting text.

When it is in Field fill-in mode.

When it is in Pan modeused for shifting the center of the


zoom area in the graphics window to display a different area
of the screen view.
When defining a selection set.

When moving selected entities.

2.9 Exiting the Trimble Geomatics Office Software


When you exit the Trimble Geomatics Office software, you do not
need to save your project. The software saves all edits to the project as
you complete them.
To exit the Trimble Geomatics Office software:
Select File / Exit.

22 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

3
3 Setting up a Project
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Creating a project
Q Opening an existing project
Q Changing the project properties
Q Deleting a project
Q Copying a project
Q Using project templates
3 Setting up a Project

3.1 Introduction
The Trimble Geomatics Office software organizes your data in
projects. A project usually covers one site and may contain several
days data collected using different equipment.
When you create a project, you begin by choosing a template for it.
This template provides your project with the basic general information
necessary for setting it up; that is, the units, coordinate system, and
display settings.

3.2 Creating a Project


To create a project:
1. Do one of the following:
In the standard toolbar, click the New Project tool.
Select File / New Project.
In the project bar, click the New Project shortcut.

24 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Setting up a Project 3

The following dialog appears:

2. In the Name field, enter a name for the project.


3. In the Template list, select a template. This determines the
initial state of the project. The details of the selected template
are displayed in the details list. For more information, see
Selecting a Template for a Project, page 36.
4. In the New group, make sure that the Project option is selected.
5. If you want the project files stored in a particular folder (other
than that specified during installation), do the following:
a. Click Folder.
b. Specify the appropriate folder and then click OK.
The folder name appears in the Details list.
6. Click OK.
The project is created and the Project Properties dialog appears. The
settings in this dialog are from the template selected for the project.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 25


3 Setting up a Project

3.3 Opening an Existing Project


To open an existing project, do one of the following:
Select File / Open Project.
In the standard toolbar, click the Open Project tool.
In the Projects group of the project bar, click a project shortcut.
In the Projects group of the project bar, click the Open Project
shortcut.
The Open Project dialog that appears displays a preview of the
project. The project opens in the Survey view at the size it was when
you last had it open.
Note When you open a project that was created using software that
included different modules (that is, Baseline Processing and Network
Adjustment), you can still view all of the survey data, such as error
ellipses and processed baselines, because it stays the same. However,
you cannot perform any other tasks that require these modules.

26 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Setting up a Project 3

3.4 Changing the Project Properties


The following sections show you how to use the tabs in the Project
Properties dialog to change a projects properties, if necessary.
To access this dialog:
Select File / Project Properties.

3.4.1 Changing the Project Details


Use the Project Details tab to enter the project information that you
want included in reports and plots. This tab is shown below:

When the project is created, the following takes place automatically:


The Description field is updated with the template name. You
can change the description at any time.
The Date field is filled in from the computer system date.
All other fields are optional and you can enter values for them at any
time.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 27


3 Setting up a Project

3.4.2 Selecting a Coordinate System


Use the Coordinate System tab to view the current coordinate system
and, if necessary, change the coordinate system for the project. This
tab is shown below:

The default coordinate system selected for the project is the coordinate
system associated with the project template. For information on
viewing and changing the coordinate system for a project, see
Chapter 4, Using a Coordinate System.

28 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Setting up a Project 3

3.4.3 Selecting the Project Units and Format


Use the Units and Format tab to set the Trimble Geomatics Office
software unit values for the current project. This tab is shown below:

These unit values include the units and format used for onscreen
display, importing, exporting, and reporting. For information about
each field in this tab, refer to the topic Project Properties dialog
Units and Format tab in the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 29


3 Setting up a Project

3.4.4 Setting up a Project for Features


Use the Features tab to specify the feature and attribute settings for the
Trimble Geomatics Office project. This tab is shown below:

Automatic feature code processing


To automatically process feature codes when importing a Trimble
Survey Controller (*.dc) file:
1. Select the Feature code on import check box. The Browse
button becomes available.
2. Click Browse and locate the feature and attribute library you
want to use. You can change this field at any time.

30 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Setting up a Project 3

Setting up a project for attributes


If you want to set up a project for attributes:
1. Select the Use Attributes check box. The Browse button
becomes available.
2. Click Browse and select a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl)
file or a Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file.
For more information, see Chapter 16, Using Attributes in the Trimble
Geomatics Office Software. For more information about feature and
attribute libraries, refer to the Feature and Attribute Editor Help.

3.4.5 Changing the Reporting Options


Use the Reporting tab to control how you are notified when a system-
generated report has been created. This tab is shown below:

In the View generated report group, select the appropriate option.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 31


3 Setting up a Project

An example of a system-generated report is the Import report. The


software creates this report when you import a Survey Controller
(*.dc) file to a project. System-generated reports usually inform you of
problems or errors in your data that the Trimble Geomatics Office
software finds.

 Tip You can view reports at any time. They are stored in the Reports
folder in their current project folder.

3.4.6 Changing the Recomputation Settings


Use the Recompute tab to specify how the Trimble Geomatics Office
software determines the calculated positions for all points in the
project. This tab is shown below:

For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

32 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Setting up a Project 3

Multiple sideshot observations


To specify how a recomputation determines the position for sideshot
points observed multiple times, do one of the following:
Select the Use best observation option if you want the
recomputation to use the best observation to determine the
points calculated position. This method is selected by default.
Select the Calculate mean from the same type of observations
option if you want the recomputation to determine the points
calculated position by meaning the coordinates calculated from
each observation to the sideshot point. The software only means
observations of the same type.

Tolerance checking
The Trimble Geomatics Office software calculates a position for each
observation to a point. If there are multiple observations, it uses
tolerance values to determine when a misclosure is reported.
You can set tolerances for survey, mapping, and unknown quality
positions. If the Tolerance checking check boxes are clear, misclosures
are not reported. If the Tolerance checking check boxes are selected,
the Horizontal and Vertical fields are available. Any observations
outside these tolerance values are reported on error.
If the Calculate mean from the same type of observations option is
selected, the software only uses coordinates that have a position less
than the tolerance values from the mean.

Changing the sea level correction for terrestrial data


If you want all distance recomputations for terrestrial observations
(conventional, laser rangefinder, reduced) to be performed and
displayed using ellipsoid (sea level) distances:
Select the Reduce terrestrial observations to ellipsoid (Sea
Level correction) check box.
For more information, refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 33


3 Setting up a Project

Geoid model quality


If your projects coordinate system uses a geoid model, the Trimble
Geomatics Office software uses the Geoid model quality field to
determine the quality of the elevations (for a GPS point) or heights
(for a terrestrial point) derived from the geoid model.
To specify the geoid model quality:
Select the quality of the geoid model from the list.

3.5 Deleting a Project


You can delete any project except the project that is currently open.
To delete projects:
1. Select File / Delete. The following dialog appears:

34 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Setting up a Project 3

2. Select the appropriate project and click Delete.


Note When you delete a project, the whole project folder is removed.
However, you can retrieve a deleted project from the Recycle Bin of
your Microsoft Windows system.

3.6 Copying a Project


You can copy a project if there is no project open. To do this:
1. Select File / Copy Project. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 35


3 Setting up a Project

2. Select the appropriate project and then click OK. The following
dialog appears:

3. In the Project Title field, enter the name for the project.
4. To navigate to the folder you want to copy the project to, in the
Folder field do one of the following:
Click the Ellipsis button to locate the appropriate
folder.
Enter the path using the keyboard.
5. Click OK.
The software puts a copy of the project in the new folder.

3.7 Using Project Templates


To configure the initial state of a project, you must select a project
template. To reduce the time required to configure new projects, create
your own templates with the properties and data that are common to
all of your projects.

3.7.1 Selecting a Template for a Project


When you create a new project, you must select a template. Using
templates in the Trimble Geomatics Office software is similar to using
template documents in Microsoft Word, or prototype drawings in
AutoCAD. The Trimble Geomatics Office software templates are
stored in C:\Program Files\Trimble\Trimble Geomatics
Office\Template.

36 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Setting up a Project 3

When a project is created, the whole templateincluding the template


foldersis copied to the new project. For example, if an ASCII file
containing control points exists in the template Checkin folder, the
same file is copied to the Checkin folder of the project. The template
you use stays the same. That is, any edits made to the project are not
made to the template.

3.7.2 Creating a Template


To create a project template:
1. Select File / New Project. The New Project dialog appears.
2. In the New group, select the Template option. Project Folder in
the Details list changes to Templates Folder, as shown below:

3. Enter a name for the new template.


4. Select an existing template on which to base the new one and
then click OK. The Project Properties dialog appears.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 37


3 Setting up a Project

5. Use the tabs in the Project Properties dialog to edit the default
settings that the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses when
creating a project based on the template. For more information
on these tabs, see Changing the Project Properties, page 27.
6. Click OK. A message appears. It asks if you want to continue
editing the template.
7. Do one of the following:
To continue editing the template, click Yes. You can edit
the template using parts of the Trimble Geomatics Office
software other than the Project Properties dialog, for
example, to enter common control points.
To close the template, click No.
Note You do not have to manually save a template. All changes to a
template are automatically saved as they occur.
The new template appears in the Templates list when you create a new
project. You can open a template in the same way that you would a
project.

38 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

4
4 Using a Coordinate System
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q The coordinate system database
Q Using geoid models
Q Viewing the current coordinate system details
Q Changing the coordinate system
Q Saving the current coordinate system as a site
Q Ground coordinate systems
4 Using a Coordinate System

4.1 Introduction
In the Trimble Geomatics Office software, every project has a
coordinate system. It is important to have the correct coordinate
system selected for your project. If you do not, the software computes
and displays incorrect coordinate values.
When you specify a template for a new project, the software applies
the template coordinate system. You can change this coordinate
system at any stage. However, Trimble recommends that you select
your coordinate system (including the geoid model for the project)
before you add points to the project. If you change the coordinate
system when points are already in the project, the coordinates of the
points change.
This chapter introduces the coordinate system database and shows you
how to:
use the coordinate systems and geoid models provided with the
Trimble Geomatics Office software
use a coordinate system from a Survey Controller (*.dc) file
define your own default Transverse Mercator projection

40 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

4.2 The Coordinate System Database


The coordinate system database is stored as a file called Current.csd.
Current.csd contains information about coordinate systems, zones,
sites, and geoid models. When you specify the coordinate system for a
project, the information comes from this database. To view the
database, use the Coordinate System Manager utility.
When you want to work with the coordinate system database, use the
Coordinate System Manager utility to:
view the published coordinate system definitions
add new parameters (ellipsoids, datum transformations,
coordinate systems, sites, and geoid models)
edit user-defined parameters
For more information about this utility, see Chapter 17, Utilities or
refer to the Coordinate System Manager Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 41


4 Using a Coordinate System

4.3 Using Geoid Models


Points observed with GPS have heights based on the WGS-84
ellipsoid. These heights are known as ellipsoid heights. To obtain
estimated elevations based on these heights, use a geoid model. A
geoid model gives the separation between the ellipsoid and the geoid,
or the mean sea level surface. By applying this separation to an
elevation, you can obtain a height which then provides an elevation.

4.3.1 Geoid Grid (*.ggf) Files


Geoid models are stored as Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files. These files
contain geoid-ellipsoid separations (also known as geoid separations)
over a defined area. The coordinate system database already contains
defined standard geoid models. Each coordinate system has a default
geoid model. To use a new .ggf file, use the Coordinate System
Manager utility to create a geoid model. A geoid model contains a
name and a reference to a .ggf file. If you install the Grid Factory
utility, you can use it to view the geoid separation in the .ggf files.

4.3.2 Using a Geoid Model to Determine the Elevation for GPS


Points
When you select a geoid model, the Trimble Geomatics Office
software uses the .ggf file to interpolate the geoid separation (N) at the
position of each GPS point observed. It then adds the value to the
observed ellipsoid height (h). This gives an approximate elevation
above sea level (e) for the GPS point.
Note For accurate elevations, observe points with known elevations
and perform a GPS site calibration. For more information, see
Chapter 10, GPS Site Calibration.

42 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

Figure 4.1 shows the relationship between the geoid and the local
ellipsoid.

e
h

N
Mean sea level

Ellipsoid

Figure 4.1 Geoid-ellipsoid separation

If you do not use a geoid model or perform a GPS site calibration, the
elevation of a point will be the same as the ellipsoid height and is not
an accurate elevation.
Note If you use a geoid model in the project coordinate system, the
software uses it to convert between local ellipsoid heights and
elevations for all point types, not just GPS.

4.3.3 Selecting a Geoid Model


To use a geoid model for the project coordinate system, use one of the
following methods:
Use the default geoid model defined for the project coordinate
system.
In the Coordinate System Manager utility, specify a geoid
model as part of the coordinate system definition. For more
information, refer to the topic Geoid Model dialog in the
Coordinate System Manager Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 43


4 Using a Coordinate System

In the Trimble Geomatics Office software, change the


coordinate system for the project. Select a geoid model from the
list of available models. For information, see Changing the
Coordinate System, page 45.
Note You can only select a geoid model for a coordinate system zone
or the default Transverse Mercator projection. If you select a site, you
cannot change the geoid model used for the site in the Trimble
Geomatics Office software. To change the geoid model for a site, use
the Coordinate System Manager utility to edit the site.

Selecting the geoid model quality


Use the Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog to select the
quality for the geoid model used for the project. A recomputation uses
this quality to determine the quality of elevations (for a GPS point) or
height (for terrestrial points) derived from the geoid model.
For information on selecting the geoid model quality, see Changing
the Recomputation Settings, page 32.

4.4 Viewing the Current Coordinate System Details


To view the details of the selected coordinate system for a project:
1. Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog
appears.
2. In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Coordinate
System Details dialog appears.
3. Use the tabs in the Coordinate System Details dialog to view the
coordinate system details.
Note If the coordinate system does not include a GPS site
calibration or adjustment transformation parameters, there are no
fields in the Adjustment tab.

44 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

4.5 Changing the Coordinate System


You can change the coordinate system for a project by using one of the
following:
The Coordinate System wizard from the Project Properties
dialog
A Survey Controller (*.dc) file
Data to initialize a default Transverse Mercator projection
Trimble recommends that you select your coordinate system
(including the geoid model for the project) before you add points to
the project.

4.5.1 Selecting a Coordinate System from the Coordinate


System wizard
The Coordinate System wizard lets you select a coordinate system for
a project. You can select one of the following:
A coordinate system and zone
A recently-used coordinate system
A site
A user-defined default Transverse Mercator projection
To access the Coordinate System wizard and open the Select
Coordinate System dialog:
1. Do one of the following:
Select File / Project Properties.
In the project bar, click the Project group, and then select
the Project Properties shortcut.
Press >)@.
The Project Properties dialog appears.
2. Select the Coordinate System tab.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 45


4 Using a Coordinate System

3. In the Coordinate System Settings group, click Change. The


following dialog appears:

Note The first time you use the coordinate system database, the
Trimble Geomatics Office software bypasses the Select Coordinate
System dialog and displays the Coordinate System Type dialog. This is
because there are no recently-used systems to access. You must select
a coordinate system for the project.
The following sections describe how to use the Coordinate System
wizard to select a coordinate system.

46 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

Selecting a coordinate system and zone


To select a coordinate system and zone from the coordinate system
database:
1. In the Select Coordinate System dialog, select the New System
option. For information about opening this dialog, see Selecting
a Coordinate System from the Coordinate System wizard,
page 45.
2. Click Next. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 47


4 Using a Coordinate System

3. Select the Coordinate System And Zone option and then click
Next. The following dialog appears:

The coordinate system group and zone entries are read from the
coordinate system database.
4. Select the appropriate coordinate system group and zone.

 Tip To view the properties of the selected coordinate system or zone,


right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select the Properties
command.

48 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

5. Click Next. The following dialog appears:

If the coordinate system has a default geoid model selected in


the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility, this geoid
model is selected.
6. In the Select Geoid Model dialog, do one of the following:
If you want to specify a different geoid model for the
coordinate system, select it from the available list. For
more information, see Using Geoid Models, page 42.

 Tip To view the properties of the selected geoid model, right-click to


access the shortcut menu, and then select the Properties command.

If you do not want to use a geoid model, select the No


Geoid Model option.
7. Click Finish.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 49


4 Using a Coordinate System

The coordinate system you selected is now the coordinate


system for the project. The Project Properties dialog shows the
system, zone, datum, and geoid model used.
8. Click OK.
Note If you get an error message saying that the coordinate system
cannot be used because the project contains null elevations, enter
elevations for these points, or specify a default elevation in the
Coordinate System tab of the Project Properties dialog. You can then
change the coordinate system. You can select all points with null
elevations by choosing Select / By Query, and selecting the Null
elevations option.

Selecting a recently-used coordinate system


The Trimble Geomatics Office software records the last ten defined
coordinate systems used.
To select from this list of recently-used systems:
1. Open the Select Coordinate System dialog. For information
about opening this dialog, see Selecting a Coordinate System
from the Coordinate System wizard, page 45.
2. Select the Recently Used System option.
3. Click the arrow buttons to scroll through the system summaries.
4. Select the coordinate system that you want to use and then click
Finish.
The coordinate system you selected is now the coordinate system for
the project.

50 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

Selecting a site
A site is a set of coordinate system parameters that you name and save
for use again in other projects. A site can include horizontal and
vertical adjustments from a GPS site calibration. For information on
creating a site calibration, see Saving the Current Coordinate System
as a Site, page 58.
To select a site for the current project:
1. Open the Select Coordinate System dialog. For information
about opening this dialog, see Selecting a Coordinate System
from the Coordinate System wizard, page 45.
2. Select the New System option and click Next. The Select
Coordinate System Type dialog appears.
3. Select the Calibrated Site option and click Next. (If there are no
sites, this option is not available.)
The following dialog appears, displaying a list of the sites
available from the coordinate system database:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 51


4 Using a Coordinate System

 Tip In the Select Calibrated Site dialog, click on a site name to view its
details in the Site Details group. To view the full properties of the selected
site, right-click to access the shortcut menu, and then select the
Properties command.

4. Select a site and then click Finish. The Project Properties


dialog appears. The site you selected is now the coordinate
system for the project. It shows the system, zone, datum, and
geoid model used.
5. Click OK.
Note When you select a site from the Project Properties dialog, you
cannot change the geoid model for the site. To change the geoid model
for a site, you must create a new site using the Coordinate System
Manager utility.

4.5.2 Selecting a Coordinate System in a Survey Controller (*.dc)


File
When you import a Survey Controller (*.dc) file, the Trimble
Geomatics Office software checks if the coordinate system in the file
is the same as the coordinate system that is selected for the project. If
they are different, the Project Coordinate System dialog appears.
Do one of the following:
Select the Convert to the data collector definition option to use
the coordinate system specified in the .dc file.
Select the Keep the existing project definition option to use the
current coordinate system in the project.

52 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

If you select the Convert to the data collector definition option and the
coordinate system in the .dc file is not Scale factor only, the project
coordinate system definition changes to the one that is specified in the
.dc file. All points in the project are transformed to the new coordinate
system. To view the details of the coordinate system, see Viewing the
Current Coordinate System Details, page 44. For the Trimble
Geomatics Office software to change the coordinate system, one of the
following must be true:
All points in the database have elevations.
The project has a default elevation specified.
If the Trimble Geomatics Office software cannot change coordinate
systems, a warning message appears.
If the coordinate system in the .dc file is Scale factor only, the steps
taken depend on the coordinate system that is defined for the project.
For information, see page 54.
If you select the Keep the existing project definition option, all points
in the .dc file are transformed to the project coordinate system.
Note If the project coordinate system is an undefined default
Transverse Mercator projection, (that is, it does not have an origin
latitude and origin longitude defined) the software automatically
changes the project coordinate system to the coordinate system in the
.dc file. The Project Coordinate System dialog does not appear. Any
existing points in the project do not change.
You can view the differences between the coordinate systems before
you select the coordinate system definition to be used. Do one of the
following:
Click the appropriate Details button to view the details of either
coordinate system.
Click Summary to view a comparison report of the two
coordinate systems. Use the report to inspect the full parameters
of the coordinate systems and find the differences between
them.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 53


4 Using a Coordinate System

4.5.3 Using a Scale Factor-Only Coordinate System


The Trimble Survey Controller software lets you select a Scale factor-
only coordinate system. To use Scale factor-only .dc files in the
Trimble Geomatics Office software:
1. Use arbitrary grid coordinates (for example, 10000, 10000) in
your Trimble Survey Controller job.
2. Create a project in the Trimble Geomatics Office software with
the default Transverse Mercator projection. For example, use
the Metric or US feet project template.
3. Import the Survey Controller (*.dc) file into your project. For
more information, see Chapter 7, Importing Survey Data into
the Trimble Geomatics Office Software.
The Default Projection Definition dialog appears. Use the
dialog to specify the false origin values for the coordinate
system. The Trimble Geomatics Office software automatically
enters the default projection with the scale that is defined in the
.dc file. It enters the false northing and false easting of the
projection using the first grid position in the imported .dc file.
For more information, refer to the topic Scale factor-only
Survey Controller (*.dc) Files Overview in the Help.
Note The Reduce terrestrial observations to ellipsoid (Sea Level
correction) check box in the Recompute tab of the Project Properties
dialog is clear. This is because sea level corrections are not applied in
the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 7.0 or later) when you
are using a Scale factor-only job.
Note If you have a defined coordinate system in the project, when
you import a .dc file with a Scale factor-only coordinate system a
dialog appears stating that a Scale factor-only coordinate system is
detected. The existing coordinate system will be used. Make sure that
the scale factor in the project coordinate system is the same as the
scale factor in the .dc file. If it is not, import the .dc file into a project
with a compatible coordinate system.

54 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

4.5.4 Using a Default Transverse Mercator Projection


The default coordinate system for a standard project template is an
undefined Transverse Mercator projection. An undefined default
projection does not have an origin latitude or origin longitude defined.
To use the default Transverse Mercator projection as the coordinate
system for the project, select a standard template (for example, the
Metric and US Feet templates) when you create the project.
When you first enter survey data to a project using an undefined
default projection, the Default Projection Definition dialog appears.
The dialog suggests using projection parameters suitable for the data
that you are entering. Different fields in the dialog are available
depending on the type of data being added to the project.
The following situations are possible:
You import a .dc file with a GPS point to a project (with an
undefined default projection) containing grid points.
You import a scale-factor only .dc file to a project (with an
undefined default projection).
You import or key in a WGS-84 point to an empty project (with
an undefined default projection).
You key in a grid point to an empty project (with an undefined
default projection).
Note When you import a .dc file containing GPS points to a project
with an undefined default projection, the project coordinate system
automatically changes to the coordinate system specified in the .dc
file.
To specify the projection parameters, from the Default Project
Definition dialog, do one of the following:
If a GPS or WGS-84 point is added to the database, enter the
grid coordinates for the point.
If only a grid point is added to the database, accept the false
northing and false easting values, or enter new values.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 55


4 Using a Coordinate System

Using a defined default Transverse Mercator projection


If you are using an undefined default Transverse Mercator projection,
you can define your own parameters for the default projection. Do this
if you require a local projection and know the origin, and false
northing and false easting values for the projection.
To define a Transverse Mercator projection from within a project:
1. Open the Select Coordinate System dialog. For information
about opening this dialog, see Selecting a Coordinate System
from the Coordinate System wizard, page 45.
2. Select the New System option and then click Next. The Select
Coordinate System Type dialog appears.
3. Select the Default Projection (Transverse Mercator) option and
then click Next. The following dialog appears:

56 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

4. Complete the fields in this dialog using the information in


Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 Default Projection dialog details

Detail Description
Automatically calculate Select this check box to automatically update origin values based on
projection parameters the first GPS point entered in the database.
If you select this, you do not need to enter values in the Central
Latitude/Longitude and false Northing/Easting fields.
Central Latitude The latitude at the origin of the projection. The false northing is
assigned at the central latitude.
Central Longitude The longitude at the origin of the projection. The false easting is
assigned at the central longitude.
False northing/ False The northing and easting assigned at the origin (central latitude and
easting central longitude) of the default Transverse Mercator projection.
Scale factor The scale factor at the origin. This represents the ratio of distance on
the projection (grid distance) to distance on the surface of the earth
(ground distance).
South azimuth system Select this check box for work in an area that uses south as the
azimuth reference (south = 0). Hawaii and South Africa use south
azimuth systems.
Positive Coordinate Select the directions in which you want coordinates to increase.
Direction

5. Click Next. The Select Geoid Model dialog appears.


6. Do one of the following:
Select the No Geoid Model option if you do not want to
specify a geoid model. Elevations for points will be the
same as the ellipsoidal heights.
Select the appropriate geoid model from the list to specify
a geoid model for the coordinate system. For more
information, see Using Geoid Models, page 42.
Approximate elevations will be displayed for points using
the ellipsoid heights and the geoid model.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 57


4 Using a Coordinate System

 Tip To view the properties of the selected geoid model, right-click to


access the shortcut menu and select Properties.

7. Click Finish. The Project Properties dialog appears. It shows


the coordinate system, datum, and geoid model used.
The project now has a defined default Transverse Mercator projection.

4.6 Saving the Current Coordinate System as a Site


A site is a set of coordinate system parameters that can also include
GPS site calibration (horizontal adjustment; vertical adjustment)
values.
If you have applied a GPS site calibration to your project, the software
stores the calibration parameters as part of the coordinate system
definition. (For more information, see Viewing the Current Coordinate
System Details, page 44.) If you want to create Trimble Geomatics
Office projects in the same area, save the coordinate system as a site.
The site is then available for future projects. This means that you do
not have to perform another GPS site calibration. For more
information, see Selecting a site, page 51.
Note If you perform a network adjustment (if you have the network
adjustment module installed) and compute network adjustment
transformation parameters for the project, you cannot save the
coordinate system as a site.
To save the current coordinate system as a site in the coordinate
system database:
1. Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog
appears.
2. In the Coordinate System tab, click Save as Site. The Save as
Site dialog appears.
3. In the Site Name field, enter a name for the site and click OK.

58 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

The coordinate system is saved in the coordinate system database.


You can use this site definition in future projects. It appears in the
Sites tab in the Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility.
Note Only use a site with GPS site calibration parameters for
projects within the area defined by the points that are used to calculate
the GPS site calibration. For more information, see Chapter 10, GPS
Site Calibration.

4.7 Ground Coordinate Systems


Some regions of the globe have very high elevations, so it is usually
better to use coordinates at the ground surface rather than at mean sea
level. This lets you stake-out from a plan.
To use ground coordinates in the Trimble Geomatics Office software
you need to:
1. Define a coordinate system for the project. For information on
how to define a coordinate system for the project, see Changing
the Coordinate System, page 45.
2. Enter coordinates for the project location.
3. Enter the ground scale factor or compute it using the
coordinates for the project location.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 59


4 Using a Coordinate System

4.7.1 Entering Project Location Coordinates


To enter project location coordinates:
1. Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog
appears.
2. Select the Coordinate System tab.
3. In the Local Site Settings group, click Change. The following
dialog appears:

4. In the Project location group, enter the coordinates for the


project location.
5. Set the ground scale factor. For more information, see the
following section.

60 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using a Coordinate System 4

4.7.2 Setting the Ground Scale Factor


To set the ground scale factor:
In the Local site settings dialog, select the Use ground
coordinates check box and do one of the following:
Enter the ground scale factor.
Select the Compute scale factor from project location
check box. The ground scale factor will be computed from
the values in the Project Location group.
Note The Use ground coordinates check box can only be
selected if a projection has been defined for the project.
For more information, refer to the topic Ground Coordinate Systems
in the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 61


4 Using a Coordinate System

62 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

5
5 Importing ASCII Data Files
into the Trimble Geomatics
Office Software
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Importing ASCII data files
Q Using custom ASCII formats
Q Events that may occur when importing data files
Q Import report
Q Example: Importing a PacSoft file containing control points
5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

5.1 Introduction
You can import a variety of data file formats into the Trimble
Geomatics Office software, as well as define your own custom ASCII
formats to import. For example, you may have a data file containing
control points that you want to import into the Trimble Geomatics
Office software so that you can perform a GPS site calibration or
network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module
installed).
If you have a data file containing design points that you want to stake
out using the Trimble Survey Controller software, you need to import
the data file into your Trimble Geomatics Office project, then transfer
the points in a Survey Controller (*.dc) file to the Trimble Survey
Controller software.

5.2 Importing ASCII Data Files


This section describes how to import an ASCII file into a Trimble
Geomatics Office project.

Using drag-and-drop
You can use Windows Explorer and the Microsoft Windows
drag-and-drop functionality to import data files from a folder on your
computer into a project. To do this:
1. Open Windows Explorer. For more information, refer to your
Windows operating system documentation.
2. Locate the folder containing the file that you want to import.

64 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

3. Use the right mouse button to drag the file onto the Trimble
Geomatics Office graphics window. The shortcut menu appears,
as shown below:

4. Select the option that matches the file format that you are
importing. If the file format you require does not appear in the
list, then the Trimble Geomatics Office software does not
recognize the file format.
To import a file of this type, do one of the following:
Define a custom import format. For information, see
Appendix A, Custom Import, Export, and Report Formats.
Use an import filter. For more information, refer to the
Help.
The software imports the file. For more information, see Events That
May Occur When Importing Data Files, page 69.

 Tip If you use the left mouse button to drag-and-drop a file, the Trimble
Geomatics Office software uses the extension of the file to determine the
file that you are importing. If the file extension is used for more than one
import format, the software uses the default format. If you do not know
what the default format is, use the right mouse button and select the
correct file format.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 65


5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office software


To import a data file to a project:
1. Do one of the following:
Select File / Import.
Click the Import tool.
The Import dialog appears.
2. Select the CAD / ASCII or Custom tab that contains the
appropriate import format, as shown below:

3. Select the file format that you want to import.


If the format does not contain coordinate system information,
click Change to select the coordinate system for the file to be
imported. You only need to use this option if you know that the
file you want to import is in a different coordinate system than
the project.

66 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

4. In the Quality for Import data field, select the point quality for
the points in the file.
The quality that you select is assigned to both horizontal and
vertical components of the points in the file. You can change the
quality of the coordinate components later using the Properties
window. For example, if the northings and eastings of points are
of control quality, but the elevations are not of control quality,
you can import the points as control quality, then use the
Properties window to change the elevation qualities.
Do one of the following:
If the file contains control points for your project, select the
Control option.
If the file contains survey quality points (for example,
centimeter precision), but are not control, select the
Surveying option.
If the file contains mapping quality points (for example,
meter precision), select the Mapping option.
If you do not know the quality of the points, select the
Unknown option.
For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.
5. Click OK. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 67


5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

6. Navigate to the folder where the file you want to import is


stored.
7. Select the file and click Open.
The software imports the file to the Trimble Geomatics Office project.
For more information, see Events That May Occur When Importing
Data Files, page 69.

5.3 Using Custom ASCII Formats


If you have an ASCII data file in a format that is not supplied with the
Trimble Geomatics Office software, you can create a custom ASCII
format and use it to import the file. For more information, see
Appendix A, Custom Import, Export, and Report Formats.
When you have defined a custom format that matches your file(s), you
can import the file to a project using drag-and-drop, or from within the
Trimble Geomatics Office software. For more information, see
Importing ASCII Data Files, page 64.

 Tip You can also add a new format by installing an external filter.
External filter programs must be written as Dynamically Linked Library
(*.dll) files with specific functions created. You can add them to any tab in
the Import or Export dialog. When installed, they appear as a normal
import or export format. For more information, refer to the topic External
Filters Overview in the Help.

68 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

5.4 Events That May Occur When Importing Data Files


When you import a file, the Trimble Geomatics Office software
performs several checks on it; depending on the type of the file.
Table 5.1 shows the messages that may appear during an ASCII file
import.
Table 5.1 Messages or dialogs that may appear during import

Message or dialog What it means What you should do


The Project Coordinate The coordinate system in the Select the coordinate system that
system dialog data file is different to the one you want to use for the project.
defined for the project. This Any necessary conversions are
message can only appear if the performed before the file is
data file contains coordinate imported. For more information,
system information. see Selecting a Coordinate
System in a Survey Controller
(*.dc) File, page 52.
The Duplicate Points The import operation has For more information, see
dialog created points with the same Managing Duplicate Points When
name in the project (duplicate Importing Data, page 70.
points)
This message: The Trimble Geomatics Office Click Yes to view the Import
One or more messages were software encountered Report (located in the Reports
problems importing the file. folder of the project) to examine
generated importing the file
the errors. If necessary, correct
the errors and reimport the file.
The Default projection The project has an undefined For more information, see Using
definition dialog default (Transverse Mercator) a defined default Transverse
projection. Different fields will Mercator projection, page 56.
appear in the dialog depending
on the data imported.
This message: There was an error in importing The file may be open exclusively
Unable to import file the file which resulted in the file by another application, or the file
not being imported. may be corrupt.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 69


5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

After you import the file(s), the software creates a selection set for
each one.
To view selection sets:
Choose Select / Selection Sets.
The list of selection sets in the project appears.
Note If you import a file more than once to the same project, the file
is added to the appropriate folder, with a dash and a number at the
end of the file name. For example, if you import a .dxf file named
MyDXFFile twice, MyDXFFile.dxf and MyDXFFile-1.dxf are stored
in the Data Files folder.

5.4.1 Managing Duplicate Points When Importing Data


Points that have the same name are known as duplicate points. If
duplicate points are present on import, the Trimble Geomatics Office
software can manage them by:
always merging duplicate points this is the fastest way to
import data and occurs by default
merging duplicate points within a specified horizontal and/or
vertical tolerance
leaving duplicate points unresolved
To specify which way the software manages duplicate points:
1. Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.
2. Click Options. The Duplicate Point Options dialog appears.

70 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

3. Do one of the following:


Select the Always merge duplicate points option. No
duplicate points are created.
Select the Merge duplicate points within tolerance option
and then enter the appropriate horizontal and/or vertical
tolerance values. (The default tolerances are determined
from the unknown quality tolerance specified in the
Recompute tab of the Project Properties dialog.) Duplicate
points are merged if they are within this specified
tolerance.
Note If both a horizontal and vertical tolerance are
specified, for duplicate points to be merged, they must be
within both the horizontal and vertical tolerance.
To specify that the software does not merge duplicate
points on import, select the Merge duplicate points within
tolerance option and enter 0.02 (the horizontal survey
quality tolerance) and/or 0.05 (the vertical survey quality
tolerance) as the tolerance values.
Note If a tolerance is not specified (that is, in the tolerances
group, the horizontal and vertical check boxes are not selected)
the duplicate points will be merged.
4. Click OK.
Note When importing digital level data, only the vertical tolerance is
used.

How the software merges points


Because a point can only have one keyed-in WGS-84 coordinate and
one keyed-in grid/local coordinate, the software uses the following
rules to determine which coordinates are used:
1. It uses the highest quality coordinates.
2. If the existing coordinate and the imported coordinate are the
same quality, it uses the office-entered coordinate.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 71


5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

3. If there are no office-entered coordinates, it uses the last


coordinate component entered in the database.
After import, the Import report lists any unused coordinate
components.
Note If the Always merge duplicate points option overwrites a
coordinate that you want to use, undo the import operation, edit the
import file, and reimport the data. Alternatively, undo the import
operation, specify a horizontal tolerance for merging points (see
below), and reimport the data.

5.4.2 Resolving Duplicate Points in the Database


If you do not choose to merge duplicate points on import, duplicate
points are created when you import one or more files that contain the
same point names. For example, duplicate points are created when you
import:
a file that contains a point with the same name as an existing
point in the database and they are not within tolerance
points with the same name from different Survey Controller
(*.dc) files
If the Trimble Geomatics Office software creates points with the same
name in the project, you can merge the survey data from each point
after the points are imported.
Note If you have points with duplicate names that are not the same
point, rename them. For more information, see Renaming Points,
page 189.

 Warning Two points with the same name but significantly different data
may be the result of an error. Merging the points may produce unexpected
results. If a warning flag appears on the point after merging, view the Point
Derivation report. For more information, see Viewing the Point Derivation
Report, page 180. When you have determined the cause of the error,
disable the bad observation or coordinates, or explode the points if they
are not the same point.

72 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

To merge the survey data from each point use the Merge duplicate
points command:
1. Choose Select / Duplicate Points / By Name.
2. Do one of the following:
Select Edit / Merge duplicate points.
In the graphics window, right-click to access the shortcut
menu, and then select Merge Duplicate Points.
All observations and keyed-in coordinates for the points are merged.

5.5 Import Report


Each time you import a file to a project, the Trimble Geomatics Office
software creates an import report for the file imported. These reports
are named <file name>.html, where <file name> is the name of the
imported file.
An imported files report named Import.html is also created. This
report lists all of the files that are imported to the project. Any files
that are imported in another session are automatically added to this
report.
The way that you are notified of system-generated reports is
controlled by the View generated report option in the General tab of
the Project Properties dialog. For more information, see Changing the
Reporting Options, page 31.
The <file name>.html report includes:
Project Details
Messages (if any messages occurred on import)
Recompute Report
The following sections describe each part of the Import report, and
include report samples where appropriate.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 73


5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

5.5.1 The Project Details Section


Figure 5.1 shows the Project Details section of the Import report. This
section shows the project name and coordinate system details.

Figure 5.1 Project details section of an Import report

5.5.2 The Messages Section


This section shows any messages that were generated on import. (For
more information, see Messages and Dialogs That May Appear
During Import, page 112). If no messages were generated, this section
does not appear in the report.

5.5.3 The Recompute Report


The import report includes a link to the Recompute report which is
created in the Reports folder. The Recompute report summarizes the
results of the recomputation process. For more information, see
Appendix B, Recomputation.

74 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 5

5.6 Example: Importing a PacSoft File Containing


Control Points
To import a PacSoft file containing control points into a project:
1. Select File / Import. The Import dialog appears.
2. Select the CAD / ASCII tab, as shown below:

3. Select PacSoft format.


4. Click Change to select the coordinate system for the file to be
imported. You only need to use this option if the coordinates in
the file are in a different coordinate system to the project. This
option is only available for some formats.
5. In the Quality for Import data field, select the point quality for
the points in the file. If the file contains control points, select the
Control option.
6. Click OK. The Open dialog appears.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 75


5 Importing ASCII Data Files into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7. Navigate to the folder where the file(s) you want to import are
stored.
8. Select the file and click Open.
The file is imported into the project. For more information, see Events
That May Occur When Importing Data Files, page 69. A selection set
is created with the same name as the file.
You can now use the control points for a GPS site calibration or a
network adjustment (if you have the Network Adjustment module
installed). For more information, see Chapter 10, GPS Site Calibration
or refer to the Network Adjustment User Guide.

76 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

6
6 Transferring Files to the
Trimble Survey Controller
Software
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Transferring files
Q Survey Controller (*.dc) files
Q Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files
Q Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) files
Q Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) files
Q Data Dictionary (*.ddf) files
Q Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) files
Q Antenna files
Q UK National Grid files
6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.1 Introduction
You can transfer to the Trimble Survey Controller software any files
that you need to complete field work, for example, Trimble Survey
Controller (*.dc) files containing points to stake out, Geoid Grid
(*.ggf) files, and Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) files.
Table 6.1 shows the versions of the Trimble Survey Controller
software that you can export each file type to.
Table 6.1 Supported file types and versions of the Trimble Survey
Controller software

File description File type Version


Antenna details Antenna.ini 6.0 or later
Antenna.dat versions earlier than 6.0
Data Dictionary .ddf 7.0 or later
Datum grid .cdg 7.0 or later
DTM points .dtx 4.0 or later
Feature and Attribute .fcl 4.0 or later (without attribute
Library definitions, including
FCLIB??.DAT, where ? stands
for any single character in this
position)
7.0 or later (with attributes)
Geoid Grid .ggf 6.0 or later
Trimble Survey Controller .dc 1.0 or later
UK National Grid .pgf 7.5 or later

78 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6.2 Transferring Files


To transfer files to the Trimble Survey Controller software:
1. Do one of the following:
Select the Export tool.
Select File / Export.
The following dialog appears:

2. In the Survey tab, select the type of file that you want to export
to the Trimble Survey Controller software and click OK.
The following sections discuss each file type.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 79


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.3 Survey Controller (*.dc) Files


If you want to place points in the Trimble Survey Controller software,
transfer them in a Survey Controller (*.dc) fileyou will avoid the
data-entry errors that can occur when entering point details directly.
Before you transfer the .dc file:
1. In the Export dialog, make sure that the Survey tab is selected.
For more information, see Transferring Files, page 79.
2. Select the Survey devices option.
3. Click Options. (This button is only available for some export
formats.) The following dialog appears:

4. Use this dialog to configure the format of the .dc file to be


created. For more information, refer to the topic Data Collector
Options dialog in the Help.
5. When you have completed your settings, click OK to return to
the Export dialog.

80 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6. Click OK. The following dialog appears:

Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is
connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data
transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to
the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.
Note If you do not have a Survey Controller device set up, see
Trimble Data Transfer, page 401.
To transfer the .dc file:
1. In the Save As dialog, select a Survey Controller device.
2. Click Open. The following dialog appears as the computer
connects to the Trimble Survey Controller software:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 81


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

When the computer makes a connection, the Save As dialog


returns. The Look in field is set to the Survey Controller device
that you are connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option
appears in the list. If you have a survey data card in your data
collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.
3. Select the Main Memory (C:) option or the Survey Data Card
(A:) option (if available) and click Open. The software reads
the folder that you selected, and displays all of the Trimble
Survey Controller jobs in the folder, as shown below:

4. In the File name field, enter a name for the new .dc file. The
default name comes from the Job name field specified in the
Data Collector Options dialog from step 5, page 80.
5. Click Save to create the .dc file and transfer it to the Trimble
Survey Controller software.
The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress of the transfer.
When the .dc file has transferred, you return to the graphics window.
The .dc file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software.
Note If you are transferring data to or from Trimble Survey
Controller version 7.6 software, use the version 7.5 .dc file format.

82 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6.4 Geoid Grid (*.ggf) Files


To use a geoid model as part of the coordinate system definition in the
field, you must transfer a Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file to the Trimble Survey
Controller software (version 6.0 or later).
Geoid Grid files are stored in the \Program Files\Common Files\
Trimble\Geodata folder. They are large filessome are more than
5 MB. However, you can use the Trimble Geomatics Office software
to extract a smaller geoid model from the geoid model specified in the
coordinate system definition for the project.
This process (known as subgridding) reduces the size of the .ggf file
that you transfer to the data collector running the Trimble Survey
Controller software (version 6.0 or later).
Note You can only subgrid from the Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file currently
selected for your project. However, you can transfer any .ggf file.

6.4.1 Subgridding a Geoid Grid (*.ggf) File from an Existing


Geoid Grid File
You can subgrid an existing Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file and transfer it to
the data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software
(version 6.0 or later).
To subgrid the .ggf file:
1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 83


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

2. Select the Geoid files to Survey Controller (*.ggf) option and


then click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. Select the Create a subgrid of a Geoid model for export to the


Survey Controller option and click OK. The following dialog
appears:

84 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the
geoid model. The Geoid Grid file field specifies the .ggf file
associated with the geoid model.
Note If the geoid model covers the world, there is no yellow
box.
4. To change the area of the globe in view, use the zoom tools
shown in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Zoom tools

Tool Function
Shifts center of zoom area

Zooms in

Zooms out

Zooms to extents

5. Use the Select tool in the Create Geoid Grid File dialog to
drag a smaller box over the area inside the yellow box that you
want for the .ggf file.
The File size field under the Grid properties group shows the
size of the new .ggf file. The Latitude limits and Longitude
limits fields show the extents of the .ggf file.
Note The geoid model does not apply to areas defined beyond
the yellow box.
6. The Survey Controller name field shows the name of the
subgridded geoid model used in the Trimble Survey Controller
job. If the Trimble Survey Controller software already uses a
geoid model of the same name, add a prefix or suffix to the
name. It must contain the name of the original geoid.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 85


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

Note During import of the Survey Controller (*.dc) file, the


Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the Survey Controller
name field to check if the name of the .ggf file used in the field
matches the geoid model defined for the Trimble Geomatics
Office project. If the name does not contain the original geoid
model name, the software does not recognize the geoid model.
7. Click OK. The following dialog appears:

Note The Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file stores the separation


between the WGS-84 ellipsoid and the geoid for the defined
area.
The default file name is the first six characters of the geoid
model name. This is not the name used in the Trimble Survey
Controller software. It is the name of the .ggf file that will be
stored in the \Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData
folder.
8. To enter a different name for the file, edit the File Name field
and then click Save.
The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.

86 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

To transfer the subgridded .ggf file:


1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device. If you
do not have a survey controller device set up, see Trimble Data
Transfer, page 401.
2. Click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When a
connection is made, the Save As dialog appears. It shows you
where you can save the file.
3. Do one of the following:
Select the Main Memory (C:) option to save the file to the
main memory of the data collector running the Trimble
Survey Controller software.
If you have a survey data card inserted in the data collector
running the Trimble Survey Controller software, select the
Survey Data Card (A:) option.
4. Click Open. The folder of the location you selected is read. Any
.ggf files in the folder are displayed.
The File name field is unavailable. It shows the survey
controller name of the .ggf file that you will see in the Trimble
Survey Controller software.
5. Click Save. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress
of the file transfer.
When the file has transferred, you return to the graphics window. You
can now use the .ggf file in the Trimble Survey Controller software.
For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller
documentation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 87


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.4.2 Transferring an Existing Geoid Grid (*.ggf) File


You can transfer an existing Geoid Grid (*.ggf) file to a data collector
running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 6.0 or later).
Before you transfer the file:
1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.
2. Select the Geoid files to Trimble Survey Controller (*.ggf)
option and then click OK. The Export a Geoid Model dialog
appears.
3. Select the Export existing Geoid model to the Survey Controller
option and then click OK. The Select dialog appears.
4. Select the file that you want to transfer and then click Open.
The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.
To transfer the .ggf file:
Follow step 1 to step 5, page 87.
Once the file has transferred, you return to the graphics window. You
can now use the .ggf file in the Trimble Survey Controller software.
For information about using the file in the Trimble Survey Controller
software, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

88 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6.5 Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) Files


To use a datum grid in the field as part of the coordinate system
definition, you must transfer it to the Trimble Survey Controller
software as a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file. A .cdg file uses a
Longitude Grid (*.dgf) file and a matching Latitude Grid (*.dgf) file.
These files are stored in the \Program Files\Common Files\
Trimble\Geodata folder.
The Trimble Geomatics Office software combines the Latitude and
Longitude Grid files associated with the datum grid. This produces a
Combined Datum Grid file that you can transfer to a data collector
running the Trimble Survey Controller software (version 7.0 or later).

6.5.1 Creating a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) File


You can create and transfer a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file to a
data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software
(version 7.0 or later).
For you to create a Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file, the coordinate
system for the current project must use a datum grid as its datum
transformation method. For more information, refer to the topic
Datum Grid Datum Transformation in the Coordinate System
Manager Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 89


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

To create the .cdg file:


1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.
2. Select the Datum grid to Trimble Survey Controller (*.cdg)
option and then click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. Select the Create a Combined Datum Grid file for export to the
Survey Controller option and click OK. The following dialog
appears:

90 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

The yellow box on the globe defines the area covered by the
Latitude and Longitude Grid files. The Latitude and Longitude
files used are shown in the Latitude Grid file and Longitude
Grid file fields.
4. To change the area of the globe in view, use the zoom tools.
5. To decrease the size of the file, use the Select tool to drag a
smaller box over the area inside the yellow box you want for the
.cdg file.
The File size field under the Grid properties group shows the
size of the new .cdg file that will be created. The Latitude limits
and Longitude limits fields show the extents of the .cdg file that
will be created.
Note The combined datum grid model does not apply to areas
defined beyond the yellow box.
6. The Survey Controller name field displays the name of the
subgridded combined datum grid used in the Trimble Survey
Controller job. Add a suffix or prefix to the name if the Trimble
Survey Controller already uses a datum grid of the same name.
The name must contain the name of the original datum grid.
Note During import of the Survey Controller (*.dc) file, the
Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the survey controller
name to check if the name of the .cdg file used in the field
matches the datum grid defined for the Trimble Geomatics
Office project. If the name does not incorporate the original
datum grid name, the datum grid will not be recognized.
7. Click OK.
Note The Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file created by the
Trimble Geomatics Office software stores datum grid
transformations for the defined area.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 91


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

The File Name dialog appears. The default file name is the first
six characters of the datum grid name. This is not the name used
in the Trimble Survey Controllerit is the name of the .cdg file
to be stored in the \Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\
GeoData folder.
8. To enter a different name for the file, edit the File Name field
and then click Save. The following dialog appears:

To transfer the .cdg file:


1. In the Open dialog, select a survey controller device. For more
information, see Setting up a Trimble Survey Controller device,
page 403.
2. Click Open. The Connecting dialog appears. When a
connection is made, the Save As dialog appears. It shows you
where you can save the file.

92 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

3. Do one of the following:


Select the Main Memory (C:) option to save the file to the
main memory of the data collector running the Trimble
Survey Controller software.
If you have a survey data card in the data collector running
the Trimble Survey Controller software, select the Survey
Data Card (A:) option.
4. Click Open. The folder of the location you selected is read. Any
.cdg files in the folder are displayed.
The File name field is unavailable. It shows the survey
controller name of the .cdg file which you will see in the
Trimble Survey Controller software.
5. Click Save. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress
of the file transfer.
When the file has transferred, you return to the graphics window. You
can now use the .cdg file in the Trimble Survey Controller software.
For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller
documentation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 93


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.5.2 Transferring an Existing Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) File


You can transfer an existing Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) file to a
data collector running the Trimble Survey Controller software
(version 7.0 or later) at any time.
Before you transfer the file:
1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.
2. Select the Datum Grid to Trimble Survey Controller (*.cdg)
option and then click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. Select the Export existing Combined Datum Grid file to the


Survey Controller option and then click OK. The Select dialog
appears.

94 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

4. Select the file that you want to transfer and then click Open.
The following dialog appears:

To transfer the file:


Follow step 1 to step 5, starting on page 92.
When the file has transferred, you return to the graphics window. You
can now use the .cdg file in the Trimble Survey Controller software.
For more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller
documentation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 95


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

6.6 Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) Files


To use a Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) file in the field, you
must transfer the library to a data collector running the Trimble Survey
Controller software. You can use a feature and attribute library to
select feature codes for points and to store attribute definitions.
Before you transfer the library:
1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.
2. Select the Feature and Attribute Library to Survey Controller
(*.fcl) option.
3. Click Options. The Feature and Attribute Library Options
dialog appears.
4. In the Version field, select the Trimble Survey Controller
version that you are exporting to and then click OK to return to
the Export dialog.
5. Click OK. The Select feature and attribute library dialog
appears.
6. In the File field, do one of the following to select the library you
want to export:
Enter the path and name of the library.
Click Browse to navigate to the library.
7. Do one of the following:
If you want to export attribute definitions in the library,
select the Export Attributes check box.
If you do not want to export attribute definitions, clear this
check box.

96 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

If the Trimble Survey Controller version you selected in the


Feature and Attribute Library Options dialog is version 6.5 or
older, the Export Attributes check box is unavailable. This is
because these versions of the Trimble Survey Controller
software do not support attributes from a feature and attribute
library.
8. Click OK.
The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.
Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is
connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data
transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to
the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.
To transfer the feature and attribute library:
1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device. Make
sure that it is the same version that is specified in the Feature
and Attribute Library Options dialog (see step 4, page 96).
2. Click Open. The Connecting dialog appears as the computer
connects to the Trimble Survey Controller software.
When a connection is established, the Save As dialog returns.
The Look in field is set to the survey controller device that you
are connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in
the list. If you have a survey data card inserted in your data
collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.
3. Select the Main Memory (C:) or the Survey Data Card (A:)
option (if available) and then click Open. The software reads
the folder you selected. All of the feature and attribute libraries
in the folder appear.
4. In the File name field, the library description of the library
appears. (This is the library name unless you have edited it in
the Feature and Attribute Editor utility.) You cannot change the
name.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 97


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

5. Click Save to transfer the library. The Sending dialog appears.


It shows the progress of the transfer.
When the feature and attribute library file has transferred, you return
to the graphics window.
The Feature and Attribute Library file is now in the Trimble Survey
Controller software. Any control codes defined in the feature and
attribute library are also transferred. For more information, refer to the
Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

6.7 Data Dictionary (*.ddf) Files


Transfer a Data Dictionary (*.ddf) file if you want to use it in the field
to collect attributes. You can create .ddf files using the Data
Dictionary Editor software. This software is available with the
GPS Pathfinder Office software. For more information, refer to the
topic Data Dictionary Files Overview in the Help.
Note You can only transfer Data Dictionary (*.ddf) files to the
Trimble Survey Controller software version 7.0 or later.
Before you transfer the .ddf file to a data collector running the Trimble
Survey Controller software:
1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.
2. Select the Data Dictionary to Survey Controller (*.ddf) option
and then click OK. The Select dialog appears.
3. Select the .ddf file you want to transfer and then click Open.
The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.
Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is
connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data
transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to
the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.

98 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

To transfer the .ddf file:


1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device (version
7.0 or later).
2. Follow step 2 to step 5, page 97.
The .ddf file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For
more information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller
documentation.

6.8 Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) Files


You can use the DTMLink module to transfer a regular (North-South
and East-West) grid of points interpolated from a Surface Model as a
Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) file for stakeout.
To create a gridded DTM file for transfer to the Trimble Survey
Controller software:
1. Start the DTMLink software and select the Surface Model that
you want to use to define the gridded DTM file. For more
information, refer to the DTMLink User Guide.
2. In the DTMLink software, do one of the following:
Select File / Export.
Click the Export tool.
The Export dialog appears.
3. Select the Gridded DTM to Survey Controller option. The Grid
Rectangle dialog appears.
4. To define the grid size, use one of the following methods:
Use the Grid Size tab to define the grid by the number of
colums and rows
Use the Step Size tab to define the grid by the width and
height of the grid cells

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 99


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

5. Click OK to start transferring the gridded DTM file. The Data


Transfer Save As dialog appears.
Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is
connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data
transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to
the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.
To transfer the DTM file:
1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device and click
Open. The Connecting dialog appears as the computer connects
to the Trimble Survey Controller software.
When a connection is established, the Save As dialog returns.
The Look in field is set to the survey controller device you are
connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in the
list. If you have a survey data card inserted in your data
collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.
2. Select the Main Memory (C:) or Survey Data Card (A:) option
(if available) and then click Open. The folder you selected is
read and any DTM files in the folder are displayed.
The File name field displays the name of the file that the DTM
points will be transferred to in the Trimble Survey Controller
software. The default file name is the name of the project. To
enter an alternative name, edit this field.
3. To transfer the data to the Trimble Survey Controller software,
click Save. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress
of the transfer.
When the data has transferred, you return to the graphics window. The
DTM file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For more
information, refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.
Note If you have created a Digital Terrain Model (.dtx) file from the
DTMLink software, you can import it to a Trimble Geomatics Office
project and transfer it to the Trimble Survey Controller software using
the DTM points to file (*.dtx) option from the Export dialog.

10 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

6.9 Antenna Files


You can transfer the Antenna.ini file to a data collector running the
Trimble Survey Controller software version 6.0 or later. Use this
option to transfer the antennas from the Survey Controller group in the
Antenna.ini file for use in the Trimble Survey Controller software.
Once the file has transferred, you can only use the antennas from the
Survey Controller group in the Trimble Survey Controller software.
Note If you transfer an Antenna file to a data collector running
Trimble Survey Controller software older than version 6.0, the
Antenna.dat file is used.
Before you transfer the file details:
1. In the Export dialog, select the Survey tab.
2. Select the Antenna details to Survey Controller option and then
click OK. The Data Transfer Save As dialog appears.
Once you have checked that the Trimble Survey Controller software is
connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data
transfer mode, you can export the data. For more information, refer to
the Trimble Survey Controller Reference Manual.
To transfer the Antenna file details:
1. In the Save As dialog, select a survey controller device and then
click Open. The Connecting dialog appears as the computer
connects to the Trimble Survey Controller software.
When a connection is established, the Save As dialog returns.
The Look in field is set to the survey controller device you are
connected to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in the
list. If you have a survey data card inserted in your data
collector, the Survey Data Card (A:) option appears as well.
2. Select the Main Memory (C:) or Survey Data Card (A:) option
(if available) and then click Open. The folder you have selected
is read. Antenna file appears in the File name field.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 101


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

3. To transfer the file to the Trimble Survey Controller software,


click Save. The Sending dialog appears. It shows the progress
of the transfer.
When the Antenna file has been transferred, you are returned to the
graphics window. The Antenna file is now in the Trimble Survey
Controller software. For more information, refer to the Trimble
Survey Controller documentation.

6.10 UK National Grid Files


Use the standalone Trimble Data Transfer utility to transfer UK
National Grid (*.pgf) files to a data collector running the Trimble
Survey Controller software (version 7.5 or later).
You can transfer any of the existing .pgf files located in the \Program
Files\Common files\Trimble\GeoData folder.
To transfer the .pgf file to the Trimble Survey Controller software:
1. Do one of the following:
Click ,and then select Programs / Trimble /
Trimble Utilities / Data Transfer.
When there is no project open, select Utilities / Data
Transfer.
When there is no project open, in the project bar, click the
Utilities group and then click the Data Transfer shortcut.
The Data Transfer window appears.
2. Make sure that the Trimble Survey Controller software is
connected to the correct COM port and is in the appropriate data
transfer mode. For more information, refer to the Trimble
Survey Controller documentation.
3. In the Device field, select the survey controller device (version
7.5 or later).

10 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software 6

The Trimble Data Transfer utility connects to the selected


device. When a connection is made, the cable in the icon at top
right changes to show that the device is connected, and the
status line under the icon at the top right reads Connected to
Survey Controller <version>., as shown below:

4. In the Send tab, click Add. The Open dialog appears.


5. In the Files of Type field, select the UK National Grid Files
(*.pgf) option.
6. Use the Look in field to change the selected drive and folder,
and to select the files that you want to transfer.
7. In the Destination field, select the Main Memory (C:) or Survey
Data Card (A:) option (if available) and then click Select. The
Open dialog closes and the Data Transfer window returns. The
files you selected appear in the Files to Send list.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 103


6 Transferring Files to the Trimble Survey Controller Software

8. Click Transfer. The Converting dialog appears as the files are


converted from the devices file format. When all files have
been converted, the Sending dialog appears. It shows the
progress of the transfer.
When the transfer is complete, the Transfer Completed dialog displays
the results of the transfer.
The .pgf file is now in the Trimble Survey Controller software. For
information about using the file in this software, refer to the Trimble
Survey Controller documentation.

10 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

7
7 Importing Survey Data into
the Trimble Geomatics Office
Software
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Importing Survey Controller (*.dc) files
Q Events that may occur when importing .dc files
Q Importing Trimble GPS data (*.dat) files
Q Events that may occur when importing .dat files
Q Importing RINEX files
Q Importing NGS Data Sheet files
Q Importing Digital Level files
Q Import report
7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.1 Introduction
After a session of field work, you import the data you have collected
into a Trimble Geomatics Office project. This chapter describes how
to import each type of file and how to use the Import report. It also
describes the messages and dialogs that may appear when you are
importing, and how the software assigns qualities to imported points.

7.2 Importing Survey Controller (*.dc) Files


Survey Controller (*.dc) files contain data from the field work you
carry out using the Trimble Survey Controller software. They can
include the following:
GPS data
Terrestrial data
There are several ways to import .dc files into a Trimble Geomatics
Office project. The following sections show you how to import files
from:
the Trimble Survey Controller software
a computer
You can view .dc files using the DC File Editor utility. For more
information, see Chapter 17, Utilities.

7.2.1 Importing .dc Files from the Trimble Survey Controller


Software
The Trimble Survey Controller software stores Trimble Survey
Controller jobs as .job files. When you import .job files to your
computer, they become .dc files.
To import these .dc files from the Trimble Survey Controller software,
you need to set up a Trimble Survey Controller device in the Trimble
Data Transfer utility.

10 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

Note If you do not have a Trimble Survey Controller device set up,
see Setting Up Devices Using the Data Transfer Utility, page 402.
To import a .dc file from the Trimble Survey Controller software:
1. Do one of the following:
Select the Import tool.
Select File / Import.
The following dialog appears:

2. In the Survey tab, select the Survey devices option and then
click OK. The Open dialog appears.
3. Select a Trimble Survey Controller device and click Open.
The Connecting dialog appears as the computer connects to the
device.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 107


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

When the connection is made, the Open dialog returns. The Look in
field is set to the Trimble Survey Controller device you are connected
to, and the Main Memory (C:) option appears in the list. If you have a
survey data card inserted in your data collector, the Survey Data Card
(A:) option appears as well.
To continue importing the .dc files to the Trimble Geomatics Office
software from the Trimble Survey Controller software, using the Data
Transfer utility:
1. Do one of the following:
If the .dc file that you want to import is located in the
Trimble Survey Controller software main memory, select
the Main Memory (C:) option.
If the .dc file that you want to import is located on the
survey data card inserted in the data collector, select the
Survey Data Card (A:) option (if available).
2. Click Open. The software reads the directory you select. It
displays all of the Trimble Survey Controller jobs in the
directory.
3. Select the file that you want to import. To select multiple files,
press >&WUO@. The software adds the selected file to the File Name
field.
4. In the File format field, select the format of the .dc file you are
importing and click Open. The Downloading dialog appears. It
shows the progress of the import.
The software imports the .dc file and stores it in the Data
Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see
Events That May Occur When Importing .dc Files, page 112.
Note If a point that you want to import has the same name and
coordinates as a point already in the project, the software does not
import it.

10 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.2.2 Importing .dc Files on Your Computer


When you import .dc files to the Trimble Geomatics Office software,
by default they are stored in the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the
project you are importing them toalthough you can store them in
any folder.
You can then import these .dc files to other Trimble Geomatics Office
projects on your computer. Again, by default, the .dc files are stored in
the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the different project.

Using the drag-and-drop function to import .dc files


To import existing .dc files from a folder on your computer to a
project, you can use the Windows Explorer drag-and-drop
functionality.
Note You cannot drag and drop .job or .raw files from a Survey data
card to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. To import these files to a
Trimble Geomatics Office project, use the Trimble Geomatics Office
software. The Data Transfer utility converts the files to the correct
format.
To import a .dc file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project, using
drag-and-drop:
1. Open the Trimble Geomatics Office project that you want to
import the .dc file to. For more information, see Opening an
Existing Project, page 26.
2. Open Windows Explorer. For more information, refer to your
Microsoft Windows documentation.
3. Locate the folder containing the .dc file that you want to import.
4. Use the right mouse button to drag the file onto the Trimble
Geomatics Office graphics window. The shortcut menu appears.
5. Select the Survey Controller files (*.dc) option.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 109


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

The software imports the .dc file and stores it in the \Data
Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see
Events That May Occur When Importing .dc Files, page 112.
Note If a point that you want to import has the same name and
coordinates as a point already in the project, it is not imported.

 Tip If you use the left mouse button to drag and drop a file, the Trimble
Geomatics Office software uses the file extension to determine the file
that you are importing. If the extension is used for more than one import
format, the default format is used. If you do not know the default format,
use the right mouse button and select the correct file format.

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office software to import .dc


files
To import .dc files on your computer into a project, using the Trimble
Geomatics Office software:
1. Select File / Import. The following dialog appears:

110 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

2. In the Survey tab, select the Survey Controller files (*.dc) option
and click OK. The Open dialog appears. The Look in folder
defaults to the projects Checkin folder, as shown below:

3. Locate the .dc file that you want to import.


4. Select the .dc file and then click Open. (To select multiple files,
press >&WUO@.)
The software imports the .dc file and stores it in the Data
Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see
the following section.
Note If a point that you want to import has the same name and
coordinates as a point already in the project, the software does not
import it.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 111


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.3 Events That May Occur When Importing .dc Files


When you import a .dc file to the Trimble Geomatics Office software,
the software performs a number of checks on the file and warns you if
the file and the project coordinate system are not the same.
The following sections describe what happens when you are importing
files, and what to do as a result of any messages or dialogs that may
appear.

7.3.1 Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import


The messages and dialogs that may appear when you import a .dc file
to a project are shown in Table 7.1.
Table 7.1 Messages and dialogs that may appear on import

Message What it means What you should do


The Project The coordinate system in the Select the coordinate system that you
Coordinate .dc file is different to the want to use for the project. If you choose
System dialog coordinate system for the to keep the project coordinate system, the
appears Trimble Geomatics Office coordinates in the .dc file change to the
project. project coordinate system. If you select
the .dc file coordinate system, the project
coordinate system changes. Existing
points in the project change to the new
system. For more information, see
Selecting a Coordinate System in a
Survey Controller (*.dc) File, page 52.
The following The Trimble Geomatics Office Click Yes to view the Import report
appears: software had problems (located in the Reports folder of the
One or more importing the file. project) and examine the errors. If
necessary, correct the errors and reimport
messages were
the file.
generated
importing the file
The Duplicate The import operation has To manage duplicate points, merge or
Points dialog created points with the same rename them.
appears name in the project (duplicate For more information, see Managing
points). Points with Duplicate Names, page 127.

112 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

Table 7.1 Messages and dialogs that may appear on import (Continued)

Message What it means What you should do


The Default The project has an undefined For more information, see Using a Default
projection default Transverse Mercator Transverse Mercator Projection, page 55.
definition dialog projection. Different fields
appear in the dialog
depending on the data
imported.
This message: Either the library used to set To import the attributes common to the .dc
The Feature and up a project for attributes is file and the project, click Yes. To only
import the points, click No. To prevent this
Attribute file defined different from the one
referenced in the .dc file, or message appearing again, make sure that
for this project is
the project is not set up for the library you use to set up a project for
different attributes. attributes is the same as the library you
use to collect attribute information in the
field. For more information, see
Chapter 16, Using Attributes in the
Trimble Geomatics Office Software.
The Select Geoid The .ggf file referenced in the Select the geoid model that you used to
Model dialog .dc file does not match a geoid create the .ggf file in the Trimble Survey
model in the coordinate Controller software. Use the Coordinate
system database. If you use System Manager utility to add a geoid
the Trimble Geomatics Office model with the same name to the
software to subgrid your file, coordinate system database used in the
this only occurs when you survey controller. When you add a geoid
delete a geoid model from the model, make sure that you reference the
coordinate system database. same .ggf file used in the field.
The Select Datum The .cdg file (Trimble Survey Select the datum grid from the list. If it is
Grid dialog Controller software version 7.0 not in the list, check that you have created
or later only) does not match a the required datum grid in the coordinate
datum grid in the coordinate system database using the Coordinate
system database. System Manager utility. If you have, check
that the datum grid is set as the default
datum transformation method for the
datum transformation group.
This message: An error during import means Check to see if the .dc file is open in
Unable to import that the software cannot another application (for example, the DC
import the file. File Editor utility). Otherwise, the file may
file
be corrupt.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 113


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Once the software imports the files, it performs a recomputation. The


recomputation examines all observations to points and shows the best
coordinates. It then creates a homogenous data set; that is, it ensures
that all data is derived from points in the same coordinate system. If it
finds misclosures, the software reports them in the Recompute report.
Correct these before you continue. For more information, see
Appendix B, Recomputation.
The software creates a selection set for each .dc file imported.
To view selection sets:
Choose Select / Selection Sets.
The list of selection sets in the project appears.

7.3.2 Trimble Survey Controller Classes and How They Are


Imported
When you create points in the Trimble Survey Controller software, the
software assigns them a point class. Then, when you import points to a
project, the Trimble Geomatics Office software uses this class, and the
method used to determine the points position, to assign a quality to
the point. Recomputations use this quality to determine the calculated
position for the point. For more information, see Appendix B,
Recomputation.
The classes assigned to points in the Trimble Survey Controller
software, and how the Trimble Geomatics Office software manages
them on import, are shown in Table 7.2.

114 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

Table 7.2 Trimble Survey Controller classes

Class Description What the software does on


import
Control The highest quality you can Imports as control coordinates
assign to points in the for a point.
Trimble Survey Controller
software.
Normal Given to all measured points Imports the observations and
apart from staked points; coordinates for the point.
also keyed-in points.
Stake Given to points measured Imports observations and stake
during stakeout. details for the point.
Backsight Given to points defined in the The Trimble Geomatics Office
field as backsight points. software treats backsight class
as normal class.
Check Given to a check observation Imports observations with
or a position keyed in as a enabled as check class.
duplicate point and stored as
a check point.
Deleted Given to points overwritten Does not import points into the
or deleted in the Trimble project. The Import report lists
Survey Controller software. the deleted points in the .dc
file.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 115


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.3.3 Qualities Assigned to Coordinates from the Trimble Survey


Controller Software
You can use one of several different measurement methods to obtain
GPS positions stored in the Trimble Survey Controller software, or
you can key them in. The quality of the coordinates of each point
depends on the method you use, or the quality you assign to the point
when keying it in.
The qualities assigned to coordinates from the Trimble Survey
Controller software are shown in Table 7.3.
Table 7.3 Qualities assigned to coordinates

Coordinate method Quality assigned


Keyed-in control Control
Keyed-in normal Survey
L1 Code Mapping
Autonomous Unknown
GPS WAAS Mapping
Copied Quality of copied point

Note For Survey Controller (*.dc) files version 7.5 or later, if you
use to determine the position of the base, an Autonomous
method is written and the software imports the position with an
unknown quality. This means that all points measured from the base
have an unknown quality. If you perform a GPS site calibration and
are confident of the results, increase the quality of the base to survey.
For .dc file versions earlier than 7.5, if you use the key to
determine the position, the base position has survey quality.

116 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.3.4 Qualities Assigned to Observations from the Trimble


Survey Controller Software
When you make an observation to a point, the quality of the observed
point comes from the quality of:
the point observed from
the observation used to derive the position of the point
The quality assigned to the observation depends on the observation
method used to observe it. Table 7.4 shows the qualities assigned to
observations from the Trimble Survey Controller software.
Table 7.4 Qualities assigned to observations

Observation method Quality assigned


Conventional Survey
Laser rangefinder Mapping
L1 Fixed Survey
L1 Float Mapping
L1 Code Mapping

7.3.5 Managing Duplicate Points


Points that have the same name are known as duplicate points. If
duplicate points are detected on import, the Trimble Geomatics Office
software can manage them in the following ways. It can:
always merge duplicate pointsthis is the fastest way to import
data and occurs by default
merge duplicate points within a specified horizontal or vertical
tolerance, or both
leave duplicate points unresolved
For more information about duplicate points, see Managing Duplicate
Points When Importing Data, page 70, and Resolving Duplicate Points
in the Database, page 72.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 117


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.4 Importing Trimble GPS Data (*.dat) Files


A GPS Data (*.dat) file contains GPS raw data from a Trimble GPS
receiver. These files can include postprocessed kinematic data and
static data. GPS .dat files do not contain any coordinate system
information, so you should check that the coordinate system defined
for the Trimble Geomatics Office project is correct.
There are several ways to import a .dat file into a project. The
following sections show you how to import .dat files into a project
from:
the Trimble Survey Controller software
a Trimble survey-grade GPS receiver
a computer

7.4.1 Importing .dat Files from the Trimble Survey Controller


Software
When you perform a GPS postprocessed kinematic or static survey
using the Trimble Survey Controller software and a Trimble GPS
receiver, and store the data in the data collector running the Trimble
Survey Controller software (or Survey data card if it is available in
your data collector), the GPS raw data file is stored as a .raw file in the
Trimble Survey Controller software.
When you transfer the data to your computer, the .raw file is converted
to a .dat file. To import the data to the software, you need to import the
.dc file that is created from the Trimble Survey Controller job. The
converted .dat file is linked to the .dc file so that when you import the
.dc file, any associated .dat files are also imported to the project.
For more information, see Importing .dc Files from the Trimble
Survey Controller Software, page 106.

118 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.4.2 Importing .dat Files from a Trimble GPS Receiver


If you collect and store GPS data in a Trimble GPS receiver, you can
use the Trimble Geomatics Office software to import the .dat file(s)
from the receiver into a project.
To import .dat file(s) from a Trimble GPS receiver to the Trimble
Geomatics Office software:
1. Do one of the following:
Select File / Import.
Select the Import tool.
The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 119


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2. In the Survey tab, select the Survey devices option and then
click OK. The following dialog appears:

3. Select a GPS receiver device and click Open.


Note If you do not have a Trimble GPS receiver device set up, see
Setting Up Devices Using the Data Transfer Utility, page 402.
The Connecting dialog appears as the computer connects to the GPS
receiver.
When the connection is finished, the Open dialog returns with the
Look in field set to the GPS receiver device you are connected to. The
GPS files in the receiver are displayed.

12 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

To import the .dat files into the Trimble Geomatics Office software
from the GPS receiver:
1. Select the file that you want to import. (To select multiple files,
press >&WUO@.)
2. Click Open. The following dialog appears:

3. Use this dialog to check the values in the .dat file before you
import it.
Note If you select more than one .dat file, the DAT Checkin
dialog displays the data for all .dat files. The Filename column
shows the file that the data is from.
4. To change the value of a field, do the following:
a. In the field, enter the correct value using the keyboard.
b. To revert to the original values, click Reset.
To change the value of multiple rows in a field at one time, for
example, if you find the antenna heights are incorrect for a
number of points, do the following:
a. Hold down >&WUO@ and select the required Antenna height
fields. (To select sequential rows, use >6KLIW@.)
b. Enter the correct antenna height value in the currently
selected field.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 121


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Note If you change a value in the DAT Checkin dialog, the


value in the DAT file is not changed. However, the new value is
the one used in the Trimble Geomatics Office software. Your
field data stays the same.
5. Click OK.
The .dat file is imported and stored in the Data Files\Trimble Files
folder for the project. For more information, see Events That May
Occur When Importing .dat Files, page 125.
Note If you import a .dat file more than once to the same project,
existing occupations in the project are not selected in the DAT
Checkin dialog. You cannot import the same GPS segment more than
once.

7.4.3 Importing .dat Files from Your Computer


You can import any .dat files on your computer to a Trimble
Geomatics Office project. When you import a .dat file from your
computer to a project, the .dat file is stored in the Data Files\Trimble
Files folder for the project.

Using the drag-and-drop function to import .dat files


You can use Windows Explorer to import existing .dat files from a
folder on your computer to a project using the Microsoft Windows
drag-and-drop functionality.
Note You cannot drag-and-drop .job or .raw files from a Survey data
card to a Trimble Geomatics Office project. To import these files to a
project, use the Trimble Geomatics Office software. The software
converts them to the correct format.

12 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

To import .dat files into a project, using the drag-and-drop function:


1. Open the project that you want to import the .dat file to. For
more information, see Opening an Existing Project, page 26.
2. Open Windows Explorer. For more information, refer to your
Microsoft Windows operating-system documentation.
3. Locate the folder containing the .dat file you want to import.
4. Use the right mouse button to drag the file onto the graphics
window. The shortcut menu appears.
5. Select the GPS data files (*.dat) option. The DAT checkin
dialog appears.
6. Follow step 3 to step 5, page 121.
The software imports the .dat file(s) and stores them in the Data
Files\Trimble Files folder for the project. For more information, see
Events That May Occur When Importing .dat Files, page 125.
Note If you use the left mouse button to drag-and-drop a file, the
extension of the file is used by the Trimble Geomatics Office software
to determine the type of file that you are importing. If the file extension
is used for more than one import format, the default format is used. If
you are not sure what the default format is, you should use the right
mouse button and select the correct file format.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 123


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Using the Trimble Geomatics Office software to import .dat


files
To import a .dat file on a computer to a Trimble Geomatics Office
project:
1. Do one of the following:
Select File / Import.
Select the Import tool .
The following dialog appears:

2. In the Survey tab, select the GPS data file (*.dat) option and
then click OK. The Import dialog appears.
3. Locate the folder that the .dat file is in.
4. Select the file(s) and click Open. The DAT Checkin dialog
appears.
5. Follow step 3 to step 5, page 121.
The software imports the .dat file(s) to your project and stores them in
the Data Files\Trimble Files folder for the project.

12 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.5 Events That May Occur When Importing .dat Files


The following sections describe what happens when you are importing
GPS data (*.dat) files, and what to do as a result of any messages and
dialogs that appear.

7.5.1 Messages and Dialogs That May Appear During Import


The messages and dialogs that may appear when a .dat file is imported
to a Trimble Geomatics Office project are shown in Table 7.5.
Table 7.5 Messages and dialogs that may appear on import

Message What it means What you should do


The Default projection If you use the default Specify the northing and easting for
definition dialog Transverse Mercator the origin point. The software uses this
projection and do not define it, as the projection false northing and
the software uses the first false easting. For more information,
GPS point in the project to see Using a Default Transverse
update the projection origin. Mercator Projection, page 55.
This message: The software has not Check if the .dat file is open in another
Unable to Import file(s). imported the file because of application. Otherwise, the file may be
an error. corrupt.
This message: The software had problems Click Yes to view the Import report
One or more errors importing the file. (located in the Reports folder of the
project) to examine the errors. If
were generated
necessary, correct the errors and
importing the file.
reimport the file.

After you import the file(s), the software creates a selection set for
each one. (Unless the file is from the Trimble Survey Controller
software. In this case, it creates a selection set for the .dc file, which
contains the same data.)
To view selection sets:
Choose Select / Selection Sets.
The list of selection sets in the project appears.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 125


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.5.2 How the Trimble Geomatics Office Software Assigns


Qualities to Imported Points
When you import GPS postprocessed kinematic or static data stored in
the Trimble Survey Controller software to the Trimble Geomatics
Office software, the software loads the .dat file together with the
associated .dc file. This means that point information from the .dc file,
such as the class and method used to derive the points position, can
link with the points found in the .dat files.
The Trimble Geomatics Office software uses this class and method to
determine the points position so that it can assign a quality to the
point. A recomputation uses the quality to determine the best position
for the point. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.
If you collect and store the GPS data in the Trimble GPS receiver and
import it into the software, there is no information on the class of the
point. By default, the Trimble Geomatics Office software treats any
points with unassigned classes as points with unknown point quality.
Note An exception to this is when the .dat files are logged from the
TRS for Windows or URS for Windows software. When you import a
point with a user input reference position set as high in the .dat file
into the Trimble Geomatics Office software, the software assigns it a
control quality. The software assigns an autonomous and averaged
quality point set as low in the .dat file an unknown quality.

12 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.5.3 Managing Points with Duplicate Names


If you import a .dat file to a Trimble Geomatics Office project and a
point in the file has the same name as a point in the software, the
points automatically merge.
When two or more points with the same name merge, all coordinates
and observations combine into one point, but only one position is used
for the point. A recomputation determines this position using the
highest quality position derived from the observations or coordinates.
If the difference between any observed or keyed-in position and the
final position of the point is outside the tolerance set for the project,
the software reports a misclosure.
Note When you import a .dat file containing a point with a control
class specified in the .dc file into a project with an existing control
point of the same name, the points are automatically merged and only
one coordinate will be used for the points position.
If you do not want the points to merge, use the Explode Points
command to create separate points. You can separate the points by
data source, data type, or all observations and keyed-in coordinates.
To do this:
1. Click on the merged point.
2. Select Edit / Explode Points. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 127


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

3. Do one of the following:


To separate the point by data source, select the By data
source option. The software creates points by separating
survey data by Source type. For information on the
available Source types, see Chapter 9, Viewing and Editing
Data.
To separate points by observations, select the all
observations option. The software creates points from all
observation and coordinate sources of the point.
To separate points by data type, select the by data type
option. If you separate points by data type, you can rename
the GPS points with a suffix.

 Tip The Explode points by data type option is used when both WGS-84
and grid points are required to perform a GPS site calibration in the
Trimble Geomatics Office software.

4. To view the number of points that can be created from the


selected option, select Details.
5. Click Explode.
The software creates separate points with the same name in the
project.

12 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.6 Importing RINEX Files


Receiver INdependent EXchange (RINEX) files contain raw satellite
tracking information and navigation, and meteorological data
collected by a GPS receiver. They are similar in content to Trimble
GPS data (*.dat) files.
The RINEX file format is an ASCII representation of data collected by
GPS receivers, and is typically obtained from base stations or other
manufacturers software. RINEX files can be transferred to a
computer and imported into a Trimble Geomatics Office project. Once
imported into the project, you can process the survey session and base
data, using the GPS baseline processor (if you have the Baseline
Processing module installed).
To use the RINEX file format, you need the following files on your
computer:
Table 7.6 Files necessary for RINEX file format

RINEX file File extension


Observation Data file *.obs, *.XXo
Navigation Message file *.nav, *.XXn
Meterological file (optional) *.met or *.XXm file

To import RINEX files on your computer to the Trimble Geomatics


Office software:
1. In the Import dialog, select the RINEX files (*.obs,*.??o)
option. (Alternatively, use the drag-and-drop functionality.)
The Open dialog appears.
2. Select the observation data file(s).
Note If the observation and navigation files do not have the same
name, you can match them in the Navigation File Matching dialog.
Importing RINEX files is similar to importing .dat files. For more
information, see Importing .dat Files from Your Computer, page 122.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 129


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

7.7 Importing NGS Data Sheet Files


National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Sheet files contain control
point information for the United States and territories.
The Trimble Geomatics Office software assumes that all NGS data
imported into a project is in an NAD-83 datum (that is, it is consistent
with a WGS-84 datum).

 Warning If the datum specified for the project is not equivalent to


NAD-83, an error message appears. If you choose to continue with the
import, the NGS coordinates are interpreted using whatever datum is
defined for the project. If this datum is not equivalent to NAD-83 this
interpretation is incorrect.

To import NGS data sheet files on your computer to the Trimble


Geomatics Office software, do one of the following:
In the Import dialog, select the NGS Data Sheet file
(*.dat,*.dsx,*.htm,*.html,*.prl) option.
Use the drag-and-drop functionality.
For more information on using each method, see Importing .dc Files
on Your Computer, page 109.
Note When you import an NGS Data Sheet file containing a point
with the same name as an existing point in the project, the points
automatically merge.

13 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.8 Importing Digital Level Files


Leveling observations or delta elevations often form part of the
terrestrial adjustment network. You can also use them to improve the
elevations derived from GPS observations. The Trimble Geomatics
Office software supports the import of files from the following digital
levels:
Leica NA 2002/3000
Zeiss DiNi 11/11T/21
Note The software does not support Leica measurement records
recorded outside of the level run; that is, 330 records.
To import Digital Level files on your computer into a project, using
the Trimble Geomatics Office software:
1. Do one of the following:
Select File / Import.
Select the Import tool.
The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 131


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

2. In the Survey tab, select the Digital Level files (*.dat, *.raw)
option, and then click Open. The Open dialog appears. The
Look in folder defaults to the projects Checkin folder, as shown
below:

3. Locate the .dat or .raw file that you want to import.


4. Select the file and click Open. (To select multiple files, press
>&WUO@.) The Digital Level Import dialog appears. For more
information about this dialog, see the following section.

7.8.1 Digital Level Import Dialog


Use the Digital Level Import dialog to:
display the data from a Digital Level file
determine which points are used to compute delta elevations
check the elevation of the starting point
display misclosures
check point names
Use the dialog to check and correct the values in the digital level
file(s) before importing the observations into the Trimble Geomatics
Office project.

13 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

The dialog is divided into two sections; the Elevation group and the
digital level table, as shown below:

The Elevation group shows the starting point information for each
level loop. It displays the following information:
Starting point name
Elevation the starting point elevation can be edited from this
field.
Elevation quality
The table shows digital level data in chronological order, with each
level loop section divided by a bold horizontal line. It shows the
following information:
Station point name
Backsight
Intermediate sight
Foresight information

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 133


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

Distance
Description
Staked delta information shows the difference between the
design elevation and the staked elevation at a point.

7.8.2 Editing Starting Point Elevations Before Importing


In the Digital Level Import dialog, enter an elevation for starting
points. The software will use this elevation to compute elevations for
other points.
To edit starting point elevations:
1. Click on any point in the loop. The starting point elevation for
the loop is shown in the Elevation group.
2. In the Elevation group, edit the elevation and quality and press
>(QWHU@. The elevation will be computed for all station points.
Use these computed elevations to check with known values and
validate data.
Note The only elevations imported are those with the elevation
symbol. All other station points will have delta elevations imported.
Their elevations will be computed during a recomputation.

 Tip Any changes that you make in the Digital Level Import dialog only
affect the data that is imported; they do not affect the Digital Level (*.dat,
*.raw) file.

Note When importing digital level data, if you select the Merge
Duplicate Points within Tolerance option (in the Duplicate Point
Options dialog), only the vertical tolerance is used.

13 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

Selecting digital level observations


The following rules apply when selecting level observations to import
into the project:
An intermediate sight cannot be selected until the preceeding
backsight is selected.
If there is more than one sight with the same name, it will select
all other observations (except for intermediate sights) with the
same name.
The level data that is imported is shown in the Point Derivation report
and the Recompute report.
When the Digital Level Import dialog is open, all observations are
selected by default. To select or deselect level observations for import,
you can do the following:
Select or clear the check box to the left of the observation.
Click Select by Filter. When you click this button the following
dialog appears:

You can select or deselect observations using the point name or


a description. To do this you can also use wildcards. For
example, you can specify that only station points with a
particular prefix or suffix are selected.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 135


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

 Tip When you collect digital level data, Trimble recommends that you
store the points that you want to import into the Trimble Geomatics Office
software with a unique prefix or suffix. For example, store all of the points
that you wish to use as station points with the prefix, STN. This makes it
easier to select points using the Select by Filter button in the Digital
Level Import dialog.

7.9 Import Report


Each time you import a file to a project, the Trimble Geomatics Office
software creates an Import report for the imported file. It names these
reports <file name>.html, where <file name> is the name of the
imported file.
It also creates an imported files report named Import.html. This report
lists all of the files that are imported to the project. The software
automatically adds to this report any files imported in another session.
The View generated report option (in the Reporting tab of the Project
Properties dialog) controls the way that the software notifies you of
system-generated reports.
The <file name>.html report includes the following parts:
Project Details
Messages (if any messages occurred on import)
Recompute report
The following sections describe each part of the Import report and
include report samples where appropriate.

13 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software 7

7.9.1 The Project Details Section


Figure 7.1 shows the Project Details section. This section summarizes
the project name and coordinate system details.

Figure 7.1 Project Details section of an Import report

7.9.2 The Messages Section


Figure 7.2 shows the Messages section. This section lists any
messages that have occurred on import (see page 125). If no messages
occur on import, this section is not displayed.

Figure 7.2 Messages section of an Import report

7.9.3 The Recompute Report


The Import report includes a link to the Recompute report which is
created in the Reports folder. The Recompute report summarizes the
results of the recomputation process. For more information, see
Appendix B, Recomputation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 137


7 Importing Survey Data into the Trimble Geomatics Office Software

13 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

8
8 Using the Graphics Window
and Selecting Entities
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Using the Trimble Geomatics Office graphics window to view a project
Q Selecting entities
8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.1 Introduction
Once you import field work into the Trimble Geomatics Office
software, you can view it in the graphics window. You can use a
variety of tools to customize the data you see in the graphics window.
This helps you to check your data. When you are checking the data,
you can select particular entities or groups of entities so that you can
edit them or view their details. There are several different selection
methods available in the software.
You can also use one of the selection methods to find specific data.
For example, if your project contains some points observed with GPS
using the wrong antenna height, you can easily select the incorrectly
observed points for editing.
For more information on viewing and editing data, see Chapter 9,
Viewing and Editing Data.

8.2 Using the Trimble Geomatics Office Graphics


Window to View a Project
When you are viewing a project in the graphics window, you can use
the following methods and tools to customize the information that you
see on the screen.
For more information about each of the tools described, refer to the
Help.
Note You can also use the zoom navigator to view the contents of a
project. For more information, see The zoom navigator, page 13.

14 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.2.1 Using the Zoom Tools


You can magnify, reduce, or move the data that is visible in the
graphics window. Table 8.1 shows the zoom tools that control the data.
Table 8.1 Zoom tools

Tool Menu Command Function


View / Pan Shifts the center of the zoom area;
changing the current screen view. If you
have a mouse with a wheel, hold the
wheel down to activate the Pan tool.
View / Zoom / In Magnifies the display by increasing the
scale. If you have a mouse with a wheel,
you can use the wheel to zoom in and out.

View / Zoom / Out Shows a greater area by decreasing the


scale. If you have a mouse with a wheel,
you can use the wheel to zoom in and out.

View / Zoom / Extents Changes the scale so that the window


displays all of the information in the
project. This option is also available from
the shortcut menu.
View / Previous Returns the display to the previous zoom.
If you have a mouse with a wheel, this
command will return you to the previous
zoom you had before last using the wheel.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 141


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.2.2 Labeling Points


You can give points labels that show their particular details. These
labels are of the same font and size as ToolTips, and make points in a
project easier to find. They can show the values of different point
fields, for example, point name and elevation.
To label points:
1. Select the points that you want to label. If you do not define a
selection, the software uses all of the points in the project.
2. Select View / Point Labels. The following dialog appears:

3. Select the check boxes for the point fields that you want to
display. For example, if you only want to display the names of
the points, select the Name check box.
4. In the Apply to group, do one of the following:
To label a selection, choose the Selection option.
To label all of the points in the project, choose the Whole
database option.
Note You can only label one selection at a time.
5. Click OK.

14 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

If you close a project between working sessions, the labels settings are
restored when you reopen it. However, labels are not stored in the
project database, so if you want to store the information that they
contain so that you can export or report it, use annotations. For more
information, see Chapter 13, Adding Entities to the Project.
Note You can create your own label options by editing the projects
Options.ini file. For more information, refer to the topic Options.ini
file in the Help.

8.2.3 Using View Filters in the Survey View


A view filter is a way to only show the data that you want to see in the
graphics windowall other data is hidden. As a result, you can view
and edit your work in the Survey view more easily.
Note Data that has been hidden by the view filter cannot be selected
using any of the commands in the Select menu.
To apply a view filter:
1. In the Survey view, do one of the following:
Select the View Filters tool.
Select View / Filters.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 143


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

The following dialog appears:

Use this dialog to hide the groups of data that you do not want
to view.
2. Select the types of observations that you want to view. For
example, select the Show all observations option to enable all
observation types to be selected for viewing.
Note The Show only observations marked for adjustment and
Show only observations able to be adjusted options are only
available if you have the Network Adjustment module installed.
The check boxes in the Types of observations to show group
vary according to the option selected. The upper group displays
the observation types that can be selected for viewing. The
lower group displays the properties for the observation types
(where applicable).

14 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

3. In the Types of observations to show group, do the following:


a. Select the check boxes from the upper group to select the
observation types that you want to view.
b. Select the appropriate check boxes from the lower group to
display only the observation types (selected in the upper
group) with those properties. If you want to display an
observation type that has more than one property, to view it
you must select all relevant check boxes.
For example, if you select the RTK and Sideshot
observations check boxes and clear the Check observations
check box, you can view RTK sideshot observations in the
graphics window, but any RTK sideshot observations that
are enabled as check are not shown.
Once a filter is applied to a project, the View Filters are on icon
appears in the status bar. You can double-click this icon to access the
View Filters dialog and make any changes to the filters.

 Tip When the Use Timeline to show dependent GPS baselines check
box is selected, only the observations that are shown in the Timeline view
are displayed in the graphics window.

View filters remain applied even after you close and reopen a project.
Note In the Plan view, use layers to filter data. For more
information, refer to the topic Layers Overview in the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 145


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.2.4 Viewing Survey Data


You can change the way that survey data is displayed in the Survey
view of the graphics window. To customize the survey data:
1. In the Survey view, select View / Options. The following dialog
appears:

2. In the Survey Data tab, select one of the following check boxes:
Use stub lines for sideshots if you have a large number of
observations from a single point, this option is useful for
minimizing the number of observations displayed.
Show number of observations (where > 1) the labels
show the number of observations.

14 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.2.5 Viewing Grid Lines


Grid lines can be used in the graphics window to show the scale of the
project and to help you to easily find particular coordinate locations.
To view grid lines in the graphics window:
1. Select View / Options. The following dialog appears:

2. In the Grid Lines tab, select the Show grid lines check box. You
can display:
A fixed number of grid linesthe same number of grid
lines will be displayed when you zoom in and out.
Grid lines at the interval that you specifythe number of
grid lines displayed is increased or decreased depending on
whether you zoom out or in.
3. Select an appropriate line type and color from the Grid line type
and Grid line color lists. You can also label the grid lines by
selecting the Label grid lines check box.

 Tip You can also display the grid lines in the graphics window using the
Grid Lines tool in the toolbar.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 147


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Note When grid lines are displayed in the graphics window and you
select File / Plot/Print, grid lines are drawn on the plot.

8.2.6 Setting the Color Scheme in the Graphics Window


You can select the colors used to display survey data in the graphics
window by setting the legend style.
To set the legend style in the graphics window:
1. Select the View / Options.The following dialog appears:

14 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

2. In the Survey Legend tab, select the color scheme from the
drop-down list. Table 8.2 shows the color schemes for both
legend styles.
Table 8.2 Color schemes for each legend style

Item Default legend Black legend


Default color for text Window text color in White
Control Panel
Trimble Geomatics Office graphics Window color in Control Black
window Panel
Color of selected entities Selected items color in Red
Control Panel
More than one type of observation Black White
(for example a terrestrial and an RTK
observation between two points)
RTK vectors Blue Blue
Postprocessed static baselines Orange Yellow
Conventional observations Dark green Dark green
Laser rangefinder observations Light green Light green
Reduced observations Green Green
Potential baselines (overlapping Grey Grey
GPS data between two points)
Disabled baselines Dark red Dark red
Any observation enabled as a check Dashed line in the color set Dashed line in the color set
for the observation type for the observation type
Flagged observations Red Red
RTK Continuous vectors Light blue Light blue
Postprocessed Kinematic (PPK) Blue Blue
vectors
PPK Continuous vectors Light blue Light blue
Normal point Black dot White dot
Station Blue circle White circle

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 149


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Table 8.2 Color schemes for each legend style (Continued)

Item Default legend Black legend


3D control point Blue triangle with dot White triangle with dot
Horizontal control point Blue single triangle White single triangle
Vertical control point Blue box White box
Network-adjusted point White solid circle White solid circle
Event marker Blue solid circle Blue solid circle

8.2.7 Viewing Background Maps


The Trimble Geomatics Office software can display Background Map
files. You can import Drawing exchange format (.dxf), Windows
bitmap (.bmp), or Tagged Image File Format (.tif) files to display. To
be displayed correctly, these files must be georeferenced, using the
ESRI World file format.
A World file is an ASCII text file with a .tfw or .wld extension. To be
used in the Trimble Geomatics Office software, the World file must:
use the same coordinate system as your project
have the same units as your project
Note The rotation in the World file is not used in the Trimble
Geomatics Office software, so the rotation of files is not supported.
To select a Background Map file to display:
1. Select View / Options. The View Options dialog appears.
2. In the Background Map tab, click Add. The Add dialog appears.
3. Locate the file that you want to use as a background map and
click Open. The file appears in the list in the File names list in
the Background Map tab.
4. Click OK.

15 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

Note Make sure that the World file is stored in the same location as
the Background Map file that it relates to. You do not need to select the
World file in the list.
For more information about Background Map files, refer to the Help.

8.3 Selecting Entities


You can select some or all of the entities in a project. To do this, use
one of the following selection methods:
The mouse
The Select menu
Table 8.3 shows some examples of functions and the selection
methods that best suit them.
Table 8.3 Selection methods

Function Selection method


Feature code processing Choose Select / Selection Sets
because the order of the selected
entities is important.
Baseline processing (If you have Select individual baselines to process.
the Baseline Processing module
installed)
Managing duplicate points Choose Select / Duplicate Points
menu command.
Browsing point information Click on any entity or entities.
Doing a multi-edit Choose Select / Points.
Choose Select / Observations.
Choose Select / By Query.
Staked point enquiries Choose Select / Staked Points.
Calibration Choose Select / Calibration Points.

The number of entities that you select appears in the status bar.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 151


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.3.1 Selecting All or None


To select all entities in the Survey or Plan views, do one of the
following:
Choose Select / All.
If you select all entities in the Survey view, the Trimble Geomatics
Office software only considers the points that are currently visible in
the graphics window. It does not consider data that is hidden by filters.
Locking a layer in the Plan view does not affect the data that you can
select in the Survey view.
If you perform this action from the Plan view, the software only
considers the points that are in a layer with the Visibility icon
selected and the Unlocked icon selected. Filtering out an
observation with a view filter does not affect the data that you can
select in the Plan view.
To deselect entities, do one of the following:
Choose Select / None.
Click an area of the graphics window where there are no
entities.
Any currently selected entities are no longer selected.

8.3.2 Selecting Entities Using the Mouse


You can use the mouse to randomly select points and observations in
the Survey view; and points, lines, arcs, curves, and annotations in the
Plan view.
To select entities using the mouse, use the Select pointer
(click ) to:
drag a box around the entities that you want to select
click the entity that you want to select

15 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

You can also do the following:


To add the entity to the current selection set, hold down >6KLIW@
and click the entity you want to select.
To invert the selection, hold down >&WUO@ and drag a box around
the selection of entities that you want inverted.

 Tip You can use the mouse to browse entities without continually
reselecting them. Hold down the mouse button over a point for a few
seconds. Keep it held down, and as you drag the mouse over entities,
their properties appear in the Properties window for you to view.

8.3.3 Selecting Points


You can select points based on information about them. To do this, use
the Select Points dialog. If you specify values for more than one field,
the Trimble Geomatics Office software selects points that satisfy all
criteria.
To select points using information about a point:
Choose Select / Points. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 153


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

 Tip If you want points to be added to any entities that you have selected
before accessing this dialog, select the Add to the current selection check
box. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the new
selection, leave this check box clear.

Only points that are currently visible in the graphics window can be
selected. If you are in the Plan view you cannot select points in a
locked layer.
The following sections show you how to use the Select Points dialog
to select points. Not all of the options are discussed, so for more
information, refer to the Help.

Selecting points by name


To select points by name, in the Select Points dialog:
1. Select the General tab, as shown below:

2. In the With name field, enter the names for the points that you
want to select and click OK.
The points matching your selection criteria are selected.

15 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

Some rules for selecting points in this way are as follows:


Point names are not case-sensitive.
When specifying names, you can use wildcards. For more
information, see Selecting Entities Using Wildcards, page 165.
Separate names with commas. For example, to select points
named 1000, 2000, and 3000, enter:
1000, 2000, 3000

The ellipsis (...) or dash () selects every point with the


specified name within the range. For example, to select points
with names including and between 1000 and 1005, enter:
1000...1005 or 10001005

Note With a range including alphanumeric names, some


unexpected entities may be selected since a full alphabetic sort
is used. If the start and end range names are numeric, then a
numeric range is selected.
To select a point name which has a hyphen in the name, put the
name between quotes. Otherwise, the software mistakes the
entry for a range of points. For example, to select the point
name a-2, enter:
a-2.
Note To select points by feature code, use the same rules as
for selecting points by names.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 155


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Selecting points by GPS quality


To select GPS points, in the Select Points dialog:
1. Select the GPS tab, as shown below:

2. Use the Horizontal precision and Vertical precision fields to


select points based on the precision values for a GPS baseline.
Click the buttons next to these fields to toggle between the Less
than or equal and Greater than or equal buttons. These
configure how you select points.
3. Click OK.
The points matching your selection criteria are selected.
Note The software assumes that any numbers that you enter in the
Select Points dialog are in the same units set for the appropriate field
in the Units and Format tab of the Project Properties dialog.

15 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

Selecting points by antenna height


To select points by antenna height, in the Select Points dialog:
1. Select the Occupation tab, as shown below:

2. In the With antenna or target height between fields, enter the


range of the antenna heights for the points that you want to
select.
The software treats the entered values as inclusive. To select
points with a specific antenna height, enter the same antenna
height value in both fields.
Note If you only enter an antenna height in the first field,
points with antenna heights greater than or equal to the height
specified are selected. Entering an antenna height in the second
field will select points with antenna heights less than or equal to
the height specified.
3. Click OK.
The points matching your selection criteria are selected.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 157


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.3.4 Selecting Observations


You can use the Select Observations dialog to select GPS observations
based on information about an observation. You can only access this
dialog from the Survey view. If you specify values for more than one
field, the Trimble Geomatics Office software selects observations that
satisfy all criteria.
To select observations using information about an observation, do one
of the following:
In the Survey view, choose Select / Observations. The
following dialog appears:

 Tip If you want to add observations to any entities that you selected
before accessing this dialog, select the Add to the current selection check
box. If you want to clear the current selection before applying the selection
resulting from this dialog, leave this check box clear.

The Trimble Geomatics Office software only considers observations


that are currently visible in the graphics window. It does not consider
data that is hidden by filters.

15 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

The following sections show you how to use the Select Observations
dialog. Not all of the options are discussed, so for more information
about this dialog, refer to the Help.

Selecting observations from a specified point


When selecting observations from or to a specified point, the direction
of the observation vector is used. To select all observations from a
specified point, in the Select Observations dialog:
1. Make sure that the General tab is selected.
2. In the From point field, do one of the following:
Enter the name of the point that the observations start from.
To select the point that the observations start from, use
field fill-in .
3. Click OK.
The observations matching your selection criteria are selected.
Note The same rules for selecting points by name apply when
specifying the point names in the From point and To point field. For
more information, refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 159


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Selecting GPS observations by baseline precision


To select GPS observations by baseline precision, in the Select
Observations dialog:
1. Select the GPS tab, as shown below:

2. Use the Horz prec and Vert prec fields to select observations
based on the precision values for a GPS baseline. The software
treats the entered values as inclusive.
Click the buttons next to these fields to toggle between the Less
than and equal and Greater than and equal buttons.
These configure how you select the points.
3. Click OK.
The observations matching your selection criteria are selected.
Note You can use the Ratio, Ref variance, and RMS fields if you have
the Baseline Processing module installed and you have processed
baselines.

16 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.3.5 Selecting Duplicate Points


The Trimble Geomatics Office software provides a quick way to select
duplicate points in the database. In both views, you can select
duplicate points based on the following point fields:
Coordinates
Name
Name and positions within a specified distance
To select duplicate points, do one of the following:
Choose Select / Duplicate Points and select the option that you
want from the list.
Choose Select / By Query and select the option that you want
from the list.

 Tip Use the above selection methods if you want to merge duplicate
points with the same name. For more information on merging points, see
Managing Duplicate Points, page 117, or refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 161


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

8.3.6 Selecting Staked Points


You can quickly select staked points in your project, based on a series
of queries. This function is available in both views.
To select staked points:
1. Choose Select / Staked Points, the following dialog appears:

2. Select the appropriate query from the list. (If you select a query
that is followed by an ellipsis, you will be asked to specify
parameter values.)
3. If necessary, use options in the Selection group to create specific
selections. You can also use these options when creating your
own Stakeout report.
For more information, see Selecting Entities Using Queries,
page 166.

16 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.3.7 Selecting Calibration Points


You can select the calibration points that appear in the Point list of the
GPS Site Calibration dialog.
To select calibration points:
Choose Select / Calibration Points.
All of the calibration points that appear in the GPS Site Calibration
dialog will be selected in your project.
Note If there are no points in the Point list, this option is
unavailable.

8.3.8 Selecting Entities in the Plan View


In the Plan view, you can also use the Select menu to select entities
based on the following Plan view properties:
Layers
Styles
Point features
For more information about each selection command, refer to the
Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 163


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Selecting entities by layer


You can select all entities in specified layers. This lets you use the
Multiple Edit dialog to change a common field for all entities in the
layer, or move entities from one layer to another.
To select all entities in a layer:
1. In the Plan view, choose Select / By Layer. The following dialog
appears:

2. Select the check boxes for the layers that you want to select and
then click OK.
3. The entities in the chosen layers are selected in the graphics
window.
Note If a layer has its Locked property selected, or its Visible
property not selected, in the Layers dialog, the layer is not available in
the Select by Layers dialog. For information about the Layers dialog,
see Layers, page 322.

16 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

8.3.9 Selecting Entities Using Wildcards


When using the Select Points dialog or the Select Observations dialog,
you can use wildcards to select multiple point names. Table 8.4 shows
the wildcards that are available and how they work.
Table 8.4 Wildcards for selecting entities

Wildcard Description
? Stands for any single character in the same position as
the question mark. For example, Tree? matches Tree1 or
TreeA. Another example, 1?00 matches 1000, 1100,
1200, and so forth.
* Stands for any number of characters in the same position
as the asterisk. For example, Tree* matches Tree, Tree1,
or Tree007.
# Stands for any digit in the same position as the number
sign. For example, Tree# matches Tree1 or Tree2.
Another example, Tree### matches Tree100, Tree101,
or Tree200.

You can use multiple wildcards. For example, 1?0*0 matches 1500,
1A0250, or 15020.
Table 8.5 shows you how to use different wildcard characters to select
ranges of points or observations.
Table 8.5 How to use wildcards for selecting entities

Type of match Pattern Match No match


Multiple characters a*a aa, aBa, aBBBa aBC, aabb
*ab Xab, BBab aZb, abc
ab* abX, abcdefg acb, cab
Special character a[*]a a*a aba
Single character a?a aaa, a3a, aBa aBBa
Single digit a#a a0a, a1a, a2a aaa, a10a
Range of characters [az] f, p, j 2, &

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 165


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

Table 8.5 How to use wildcards for selecting entities (Continued)

Type of match Pattern Match No match


Outside a range [!az] 9, &, % b, d
Not a digit [!09] A, a, &, ~ 0, 1, 9
Combined a[!bm]# An9, az0, a99 abc, aj0

Note The point name 10 is considered to fall between 1 and a. It will


not fall in the range 1 to 9 because both names are numeric. Similarly,
ab sorts between a and b.
Use double quotes to prevent pattern matching in names that contain
wild card characters. For example, "TRS#1...TRS#8" selects the range
of points with explicit names between TRS#1 and TRS#8.

8.3.10 Selecting Entities Using Queries


A query retrieves data from multiple fields in one or more tables in the
database, based on the criteria specified.
You can use queries to select entities. The same queries are available
in both the Survey and Plan views.

16 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

To access these queries:


Choose Select / By Query. The following dialog appears:

If a query has an ellipsis at the end of the name, you must enter one or
more parameters to complete the query. For example, if you select the
Points by description... query, a dialog appears. You must enter the
points description field.
If necessary, use the following options in the Selection group to create
specific selections:
New creates a new selection set
Add to current adds the selection set that you create to the
current selection set
Refine current using the current selection set, the
software finds points that are common with the selection
set you are about to create
For example, you may have a project in which you want to find all
unprocessed baselines that were observed using a GPS receiver with
serial number 1234. To do this:
1. Use the query to select all unprocessed baselines.
2. Use the query again to select the Baselines using
receiver option.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 167


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

3. In the Selection group, select the Refine current option.


4. In the Select by Query - Parameters dialog that appears,
enter 1234.
All unprocessed baselines that were observed with receiver 1234 will
be selected.
For more information about select queries, refer to the Help.
Note You can create your own database queries using the Microsoft
Access software. For information, refer to the topic Database Queries
Overview in the Help.

8.3.11 Using Selection Sets


A selection set is anything that you currently have selected in the
Trimble Geomatics Office software. You can save your current
selection set at any time and retrieve it later. These saved selection sets
maintain the order of their entities. If you delete entities that are part of
the selection set, the selection set still works with the remaining
entities.

Saving the current selection set


To save the current selection set:
1. Choose Select / Selection Sets / Save. The following dialog
appears:

2. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the set and then
click OK.
The selection set is saved.

16 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities 8

Note When you import a data file, the software automatically creates
a selection set for you. This selection set has the same name as the file
you imported.

Retrieving a saved selection set


You can retrieve a saved selection set at any timethis is useful for
reporting on points or for quickly retrieving control points to be used
in a GPS site calibration.
To retrieve a saved selection set:
1. Choose Select / Selection Sets / Retrieve. The following dialog
appears:

Each item in the Selection sets list is either a data file you have
imported or a saved selection set.
2. Select the check boxes for the selection sets you want to retrieve
and then click OK.
The entities in the selection set(s) chosen are selected.

 Tip You can use the Show only data in the selection set option in the
View Filters dialog to display data that you have saved in a selection set.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 169


8 Using the Graphics Window and Selecting Entities

To access a list of the ten most recently-used selection sets:


1. Choose Select / Selection Sets.
This list appears in the menu, as shown below:

2. Choose the selection set that you require.

17 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

9
9 Viewing and Editing Data
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Properties window overview
Q Viewing survey data in the Properties window
Q Viewing and editing points
Q Viewing observations
Q Viewing erroneous data
Q Editing survey data
Q Editing multiple entities at one time
Q Using the data analysis tools
Q Viewing note records
Q Viewing CAD entities
9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.1 Introduction
At various stages in a project you need to verify your data before
proceeding with the next task. This chapter shows you how to use the
Properties window to:
view and edit details for points and other observation types
check erroneous data
view and edit CAD entities
It also shows ways to correct your survey data and use data analysis
tools.

9.2 Properties Window Overview


The Properties window lets you view the details of all entities (points,
observations, lines, arcs, curves, text, annotations). Use it whenever
you want to view and edit entity details. The software immediately
applies any changes that you make to entities in the Properties
window.
You can keep the Properties window open while you use other parts of
the Trimble Geomatics Office software. The Properties window is
automatically updated to show the correct information about the
currently selected entities.
The tree view in the Properties window shows the names and values
of the selected item, and the relationship between the entities. For
example, to view the from and to points for any observation or
linetype entity, click the plus (+) icon and select the point that you
want to view and edit.

17 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

You can select one or more entities to view in the Properties window
at the same time. When you have defined a current selection set and
selected an entity to view from the Properties window selection list,
the current selection in the graphics window is updated to include only
the entity that you are viewing. The Properties window selection list
retains the original selection set. Any entities highlighted in the
Properties window selection list become the current selection set in
the graphics window.
To open the Properties window, do one of the following:
Select Edit / Properties.
In the standard toolbar, select the Edit Properties tool.
Double-click a graphical entity.
Figure 9.1 shows the Properties window, and the table following it
describes each part.

1 5 2

Figure 9.1 The Properties window

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 173


9 Viewing and Editing Data

Part Function
1 Shows the number of items selected.
2 The tabs organize data into groups. The availability of the tabs depends on the type
of entity selected.
3 Lists the entities in your current selection set. You can only view the details of one
entity at a time. If you have more than one entity selected, from the list select the
entity you want to look at.
4 Lets you expand and collapse the tree view outline.
5 Selection tools:

The Group Survey Data tool groups data by source or type.

The Sort tool sorts the selected entities. To do this, select the option you want.

The Filter tool only keeps an entity type in the current selection set.

The information and tabs available on the right side of the Properties
window depend on the entity type currently selected. The following
sections describe how to use the Properties window to view and edit
data for each type.

17 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.3 Viewing Survey Data in the Properties window


Use the Survey tab of the Properties window to view and edit the
survey-related properties of an entity in the selection. You can view
the properties of entities that appear in the Survey view such as:
Points
GPS observations
Conventional observations
Level observations
Laser rangefinder observations
Azimuth observations
Reduced observations
Staked-out point information
Events data

9.3.1 Using Pages to View Survey Details


Survey details in the Properties window are organized into pages. You
can only view one page at a time. Access the pages using the available
page buttons. They depend on the entity type that is currently selected.
Figure 9.2 shows the typical parts of a page in the Survey tab.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 175


9 Viewing and Editing Data

Page name

Page buttons

Figure 9.2 The Survey tab

9.4 Viewing and Editing Points


Point details in the Properties window are organized into the
following tabs:
Use the Survey tab to view and edit the survey-related details of
a selected point.
Use the Stakeout tab to view details about staked out points.
Use the CAD tab to view and edit the CAD-related details of a
selected point.
If a selected point contains attribute information and you have
set up the project for attributes, use the Attributes tab to view
this information.
To view and edit the details of a point, select the appropriate tab in the
Properties window.

17 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following sections describe the details of a point that you can
view, using the Properties window.

9.4.1 Viewing Survey Details


Use the Survey tab in the Properties window to view and edit the
survey-related details of the selected point (for example, the derived
position, warning messages, occupation and setup details,
coordinates, and observation statistics).
To view the survey details for a point:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a point.
In the graphics window, select a point.
2. Select the Survey tab.
To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click
a page button.

 Tip To view the from and to points for any observation, click the plus (+)
icon beside the observation. Then, click the point that you want to view
and edit.

The following Properties window shows a typical page for a point:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 177


9 Viewing and Editing Data

Table 9.1 summarizes the pages for points in the Properties window.
For more information on each page, refer to the appropriate Help
topics.
Table 9.1 Pages for points in the Properties window

Button Page name What it shows


Summary The point name, the derived position, and qualities for a
point.
Use this page to view the qualities of the position
components or report on how the point was derived.
Warning A warning message indicating that a misclosure has been
detected on the point, or that a high RMS was detected.
Use this page to view the error message and to suppress
the warning flags displayed in the graphics window if the
error is acceptable for the project.
Occupations and Details of any GPS occupation or terrestrial setup from or to
Setups the point.
Use this page to view and correct the details for the GPS
occupation or terrestrial setup details, for example, antenna
and target heights. If there is more than one occupation or
setup for the point, a shortcut menu appears. As you hold
the pointer over different occupations and setups in the
shortcut menu, the occupation and setup details are
updated in the page.
Error Estimate The estimated errors for the points position after a network
adjustment, if you have the Network Adjustment module
installed.
N/A Coordinate The underlying coordinates and qualities for a point.
Use this page to change the coordinate qualities and status
of the point.
For more information on using this page, see Changing the
status of coordinates, page 184.
N/A GPS Solution The position solution of a GPS point including the time of
(APC) occupation, WGS-84 coordinates, and precisions.
Use this page to view the position solution and to change
the status of the point.

17 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

Note If the Summary page is set to display the point as a WGS-84


position, the fields displayed will depend on what is set for the Display
WGS-84 as setting in the Units and Format tab of the Project
Properties dialog. For example, if the Display WGS-84 as field is set
to X,Y,Z, the WGS-84 fields in the Summary page are labeled X,Y,Z. If
the Display WGS-84 as field is set to L,L,H, the WGS-84 fields are
labeled Latitude, Longitude, and Height.

9.4.2 Point Quality Indicators


The Properties window shows the quality of each coordinate
component. Table 9.2 describes these qualities.
Table 9.2 Point quality indicators

Symbol Quality
Fixed Control (yellow)

Adjusted

Control (blue)

Survey

Mapping

Unknown

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 179


9 Viewing and Editing Data

 Tip The geoid indicator is used in the Properties window to show if the
elevation or height was derived from a geoid. For example, if an RTK
point is measured, it will have a height on WGS-84 and an elevation
derived from the geoid. Conversely, if a terrestrial point is collected, it will
have an elevation and a WGS-84 height derived from the geoid. These
indicators are also used in the Point Derivation report and the Recompute
report.

9.4.3 Viewing the Point Derivation Report


The Point Derivation report shows how a recomputation determined
the calculated position for a point. To generate this report for any
point, in the Properties window:
1. Select the point that you want to view.
2. To open the Summary page, click the Summary
button.
3. Select the Show derivation report tool.
4. An HTML report is generated and displayed on the default
HTML viewer on your computer.
When a Point Derivation report is generated, it is stored in the Reports
folder. The existing Point Derivation report is overwritten.
The format of the report is the same as the Point Derivations section of
the Recompute report. For information on the content of the report,
see The Point Derivations Section, page 516.

18 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

Figure 9.3 and Figure 9.4 show parts of the Point Derivation report.

Figure 9.3 The Point Derivations section

Figure 9.4 The Survey Data section

Note Before you can view a Point Derivation report, you must have
performed a recomputation since opening the project.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 181


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.4.4 Entering Coordinates for a Point


You can enter control coordinates for a point into the Trimble
Geomatics Office software by:
importing a Trimble Survey Controller job with keyed-in
control coordinates entered in the field. For more information,
refer to the Trimble Survey Controller documentation.
importing an ASCII file with control points. For more
information, see Chapter 5, Importing ASCII Data Files into the
Trimble Geomatics Office Software.
entering known coordinates for an existing point using the
Properties window or the Points dialog (if you have the
Network Adjustment module installed). For information on
using the Points dialog, refer to the Network Adjustment
module Help.
entering known coordinates for a new point using the Insert
Points dialog. For more information, see Adding Points,
page 338.
Any coordinates entered receive an office-entered coordinate source.
This is shown in the Properties window.
Note Each point in the Trimble Geomatics Office software can only
have one keyed-in WGS-84 coordinate and one keyed-in grid/local
coordinate.
The following section describes how to use the Properties window to
enter known coordinates for an existing point.

Using the Properties window to enter coordinates for a


point
You can key in coordinates for a point using the Properties window.
However, only do this when you want the software to use your
keyed-in coordinate in preference to the coordinates derived from
observations. The keyed-in coordinate will have an office-entered
source.

18 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

To key in coordinates using the Properties window:


1. Select the point that you want to add coordinates for.
2. To open the Properties window, select the Edit Properties
tool.
3. To open the Summary page, click the Summary page
button.
4. Select the Add coordinate tool.
Select the coordinate type to be added from the drop-down list
(WGS-84, Grid or Local). You can only enter one grid/local and
one WGS-84 coordinate for each point, so if a WGS-84
coordinate already exists, then you cannot add another.
5. A keyed-in coordinate appears in the point tree, as shown
below:

6. In the coordinate fields, enter the known coordinates.


When you add a new coordinate, all of the fields are null (?).
Use the Insert Current Value tool to enter the current point
position and quality. You must select each field before the Add
current value field is available.
7. To set the quality for the point, select the Quality Selector
Control tool and the coordinate(s) that you want to change.
Select the quality from the list.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 183


9 Viewing and Editing Data

8. Use the Coordinate Type option to store the data in the database
in the format specified. The software saves the coordinate in the
coordinate view selected.
Note You can only edit the coordinates in the display format that is
stored in the database.
Note If you have a keyed-in grid coordinate and a keyed-in WGS-84
coordinate, you cannot save the keyed-in grid coordinate as a WGS-84
coordinate.

Changing the status of coordinates


To change the status of an underlying coordinate using the Properties
window, in a Coordinate page:
1. In the Status field, select the appropriate option. Do one of the
following:
If you want the coordinate used to derive the position of
the point, select Enabled.
If you do not want the coordinate used to derive the
position of the point, select Disabled.
If you only want the coordinate used if there are no other
enabled observations or coordinates that can be used to
derive the position of the point, select Enabled as check.
2. Click OK.
The software performs a recomputation, and you can view the new
derived position for the point in the Summary page of the Properties
window.
Note The Recompute report reports on coordinates enabled as
check, but not on disabled coordinates.

18 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

You can also view the source information from which the survey data
is derived. This information is shown in any of the pages (except the
Summary page) of the Survey tab for a coordinate or observation.
Table 9.3 shows some common source types that may appear in the
Properties window.
Table 9.3 Common source types of survey data

Source type What it contains


Imported file All survey data contained from an imported file source, such as
observations, GPS occupations, keyed-in coordinates,
conventional instrument/target setups, level, and azimuth
observations. The Source type heading displays the file format
and the file name. For example, .dc file (RTK___co.dc).
Keyed-in Coordinate The position of the point determined by entering coordinates
into the software.
Elevation adjustment The position of a point determined after applying an elevation
adjustment.
Coordinate transformation The position determined by moving a point or after applying a
horizontal coordinate transformation.
Baseline Processor (If you The observation solution determined after processing the
have the Baseline baseline with the WAVE Baseline Processor.
Processing module installed)
Adjustment (If you have the The position of the point that has been determined after a
Network Adjustment module network adjustment.
installed)

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 185


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.4.5 Viewing Stakeout Information for a Point


Use the Stakeout tab of the Properties window to view information
about staked out points. You can view the information related to the
following:
As-staked deltas
Linear details
Catch points
Story boards
Digital Terrain Models
To view the stakeout information for a point:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a point.
In the graphics window, select a point.
2. Select the Stakeout tab.
To select the types of stakeout information that you want to view, click
a page button. The following Properties window shows a typical page
selected for a point:

18 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

Table 9.4 summarizes the pages for stakeout in the Properties window.
For more information on each page, refer to the appropriate Help
topic.
Table 9.4 Pages for stakeout in the Properties window

Button Page name What it shows


As Staked Deltas The differences between the location of the design
point and the staked out point.

Linear Details The stakeout details from linear features. For


example, a line, curve, or road.

Catch Point Design The point where a design surface intersects the
natural surface is known as the catch point. This page
shows details about the catch point and is only
available when a point is staked out from a catch point
on a road.
Story Board The distances from the catch point to points on the
template.

DTM Details about staked DTM points. For example, DTM


name, vertical offset, and cut/fill information.

For more information about the Stakeout tab, refer to the Properties
Window Stakeout tab Overview topic in the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 187


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.4.6 Viewing CAD Details


Use the CAD tab in the Properties window to view and edit the
CAD-related information of the selected point (for example, CAD
style, layer, feature code value, and description).
To view the CAD-related details of a point:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a point.
In the graphics window, select a point.
2. Select the CAD tab. The following Properties window shows
the CAD-related details of a selected point.

3. To edit the details, enter values in the appropriate fields or select


an option from the list.
If a layer or point style has not been specified for a point, the
software uses the default settings.

 Tip To view any CAD entities assigned to the point (for example, lines,
curves, arcs, and annotations), click the plus (+) icon beside the point.
Then, click the entity that you want to view.

18 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.4.7 Attributes
Use the Attributes tab in the Properties window to manage the
attributes for a selected point (for example, you can view, edit, add,
and delete attributes).
To access the Attributes tab:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a point.
In the graphics window, select a point.
2. Select the Attributes tab.
Note The Attributes tab is not available until you set up the project
for attributes (from the Features tab of Project Properties dialog). For
more information, see Setting up a Project for Features, page 30.
For more information on using attributes, see Chapter 16, Using
Attributes in the Trimble Geomatics Office Software.

9.4.8 Renaming Points


If you have points with duplicate names in a project that are not to the
same physical point, you can resolve the duplicate points by renaming
them.
For example, you may import two Survey Controller (*.dc) files
collected by different field crews. One field crew may use point names
from 1000 to 2000, while the other crew uses point names from 1000
to 1050.
When the files are imported, 51 duplicate points (1000 to 1050) are
created in the database.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 189


9 Viewing and Editing Data

To resolve the duplicate points, you can rename the points from the
second .dc file:
1. To select the points, choose Select / Points. The Select Points
dialog appears.
2. Click the drop-down arrow in the From source(s) field and
select the name of the second .dc file from the list. All points
from the second .dc file are selected.
3. Select Edit / Rename Points. The following dialog appears:

4. In the Rename dialog, use one of the available methods to


rename the points. For example:, enter 2001 in the Rename from
field to rename the points starting from 2001 (the points will be
named 2001, 2002,..., 2051).
If the duplicate points are to the same point, then you should resolve
them by merging. For information on merging duplicate points, see
Managing Points with Duplicate Names, page 127.
Note If you enter an alphabetic name in the Replace from field, all
points in the selection will be given the same name. Enter a numeric
value for the last character of the name to increment point names.

19 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.5 Viewing Observations


You can view the survey details of any observation type, such as:
GPS observations
Conventional observations
Level observations
Laser rangefinder observations
Azimuth observations
Reduced observations
The following sections describe how to use the Properties window to
view the survey details for each observation type.

9.5.1 GPS Observations


Use the Properties window to view the details of any GPS observation
type such as RTK, Static, FastStatic and postprocessed kinematic
baselines.
To view the survey details of an observation:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a GPS
observation.
In the graphics window, select a GPS observation.
2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click
a page button.

 Tip To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon
beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 191


9 Viewing and Editing Data

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a


Real Time Kinematic (RTK) GPS observation. The page buttons
shown are the same for all GPS observation types:

Table 9.5 summarizes the pages for GPS observations in the


Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the
appropriate Help topic.
Table 9.5 Pages for GPS observations in the Properties window

Button Page name What it shows


Summary The observation details, including the from and to points,
time of occupation, processor type, GPS field method, and
status.
Use this page to view the observation details and to disable
bad observations (such as when the observation produces
a misclosure). If you do not want to use the observation in
a network adjustment, but still want to use it in a
recomputation, clear the Use in Network Adjustment check
box.
Warning A warning message indicating that the baseline has failed
the rejection criteria.
If you decide that the error on the observation is acceptable
for the survey, use this page to view the error message and
to suppress the warning flags displayed in the graphics
window.

19 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

Table 9.5 Pages for GPS observations in the Properties window (Continued)

Button Page name What it shows


Base The base, or from point, occupation details for the
Occupation observation. This includes the point name, time of
occupation, and antenna details.
If the antenna details have been incorrectly entered during
the occupation, use this page to correct them for the
base/from point.
Rover The rover, or to point, occupation details for the
Occupation observation. This includes the point name, time of
occupation, and antenna details.
If the antenna details have been incorrectly entered during
the occupation, use this page to correct them for the
rover/to point occupation.
Observation The observation solution type, and the baseline
components from the base point to the rover point.
If you have processed the baseline more than once, using
different processing styles, the baseline may have more
than one solution. Use this page to select the active
solution and view the values of the GPS baseline in XYZ,
geodetic, and delta NEU views.
Observation The appropriate solution statistics and quality indicators
Statistics depending on the observation type selected. The statistics
are different for an RTK observation than for a static or
postprocessed observation
Use this page to check the quality of the solution.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 193


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.5.2 Conventional Observations


Use the Properties window to view the details of any terrestrial
observation measured in the field using a conventional instrument.
To view the survey details of an observation:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a
conventional observation.
In the graphics window, select a conventional observation.
2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click
a page button.

 Tip To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon
beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a


conventional observation:

Table 9.6 summarizes the pages for conventional observations in the


Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the
appropriate Help topics.

19 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

Table 9.6 Pages in the Properties window for conventional observations

Button Page name What it shows


Summary The instrument setup details including the instrument point
name, instrument height and backsight details. The foresight
point details are also shown.
Use this page to check the backsight details and to correct
the instrument setup, such as when the instrument height has
been incorrectly entered during the setup.
Use this page to disable bad observations when you do not
want them used to determine the position of a point. If the
observation is a check on a backsight point, enable the
observation as a check. This ensures that the software
reports a closure, but does not use the observation to
determine the coordinate.
Target Setup The backsight point name and the target setup details;
including the foresight point name, foresight point height, and
prism constant.
Use this page to correct the setup details, such as when the
height has been incorrectly entered during the setup.
Observation The observation components between the instrument and
target setups.
Use this page to view the observation details in either
HA,VA,SD or AZ,HD,VD views, and the observation type.
The observation type displays the face of the instrument used
when the observation was taken. If the face is MTA, the
observation is the mean of the turned angles between the
backsight point and the observed point in the same setup.
Observation The standard errors for the horizontal angle, vertical angle,
Statistics and slope distance.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 195


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.5.3 Level Observations


Use the Properties window to view the details of any level observation
measured in the field, using a level.
To view the survey details of a level observation:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a level
observation.
In the graphics window, select a level observation.
Note If your level observations do not have associated
horizontal coordinates, you cannot see them in the
graphics window. Use one of the selection tools to select
level observations. For example, in the Select
Observations dialog, select delta elevations from the type
field and then open the Properties window.
Click a page button to select the types of survey details that
you want to view.

 Tip To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon
beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a


level observation:

19 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

Table 9.7 summarizes the pages for level observations in the


Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the
appropriate Help topics.
Table 9.7 Pages in the Properties window for level observations

Button Page name What it shows


Summary The from and to points, and the delta elevation of the
observation.
Use this page to disable bad observations when you do not
want them used to determine the height of a point.
Observation The observation statistics for the level observation. Use this
Statistics page to view the standard error, standard error unit, number
of turns, and the length of line.
The standard error is calculated using the length of the line.

9.5.4 Laser Rangefinder Observations


Use the Properties window to view the details of any terrestrial
observation measured in the field using a laser rangefinder.
To view the survey details of a laser rangefinder observation:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a laser
rangefinder observation.
In the graphics window, select a laser rangefinder
observation.
2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click
a page button.

 Tip To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon
beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 197


9 Viewing and Editing Data

The following Properties window shows page for a laser observation:

Table 9.8 summarizes the pages for laser observations in the


Properties window. For more information on each page, refer to the
appropriate Help topic.
Table 9.8 Pages in the Properties window for laser observations

Button Page name What it shows


Summary The instrument point name and height, the target point name and
height, and the status of the observation.
Use this page to correct the instrument and target heights if they
have been incorrectly entered during the setup.
As laser rangefinder observations are of a lower quality than
conventional observations, they are only used to coordinate points
if there are no other types of observations to the points.
Use this page to disable the observation if you do not want it used
to determine the position of a point.
If you want this observation used to derive the position of a point,
(if no other enabled observations can be used) enable it as a
check.
Observation The observation components between the laser and target setups.
If the vertical angle measurement is null, it is assumed that the
distance is horizontal.
Use this page to view the observation values, and edit the
magnetic declination of the observation.

19 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.5.5 Azimuth Observations


Use the Properties window to view details of azimuth observations.
The azimuth observations can be from the field or keyed in.

 Tip Use the Insert Azimuth dialog to insert an azimuth between two
points.

To view the survey details of an azimuth observation:


1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select an
azimuth observation.
In the graphics window, select an azimuth observation.
2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click
a page button.
The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for an
azimuth observation:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 199


9 Viewing and Editing Data

Table 9.9 describes the page buttons for azimuth observations in the
Properties window.
Table 9.9 Pages in the Properties window for azimuth observations

Button Page Name What it shows


Summary The from and to points, and the azimuth. Use this page to
disable the observation if you do not want it used to
determine the position of a point.
If you want this observation used to derive the position of a
point (if no other enabled observations can be used), enable
it as a check.
Warning A warning message indicating that the azimuth observation
is out of tolerance.

Observation The observation statistics for the level observation. Use this
Statistics page to view the standard error, standard error unit, number
of turns, and the length of line.
The standard error is calculated using the length of the line.

9.5.6 Reduced Observations


Use the Properties window to view the details of reduced terrestrial
observations such as offsets that have been measured in the field using
the Trimble Survey Controller software.
To view the survey details of a reduced observation:
1. In the Properties window, do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a reduced
observation.
In the graphics window, select a reduced observation.
2. To select the types of survey details that you want to view, click
a page button.

 Tip To view an observation from or to a point, click the plus (+) icon
beside the point. Then, click the observation that you want to view.

20 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following Properties window shows a typical page selected for a


reduced observation:

Table 9.10 describes the page buttons for reduced observations in the
Properties window.
Table 9.10 Pages in the Properties window for reduced observations

Button Page Name What it shows


Summary The from and to points, and the status of the observation.
Use this page to disable the observation if you do not want it
used to determine the position of a point.
If you want this observation used to derive the position of a
point, (if no other enabled observations can be used) enable
it as a check.
Observation The observation components including the azimuth,
horizontal distance, and vertical distance.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 201


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.6 Viewing Erroneous Data


The Trimble Geomatics Office software may find the following errors:
A point has been incorrectly observed.
There is a misclosure between two or more observations to the
same point.
When this happens, the graphics window displays a warning flag on
the point or observation, and the Flag icon appears in the status
bar.
Warning flags only indicate a possible error in the point; they do not
disable the point.
Note No matter how many suppressed flags a point has, if it has one
enabled error flag, it will be shown as a flag in the graphics window.
You can view the warning details in the Properties window. To do this:
1. Do one of the following:
Click the point or observation with a warning flag that you
want to view.
To select all entities with warning flags, double-click on
the Flag icon in the status bar.
2. If you have more than one entity selected, in the Properties
window select the point or observation that you want to view.
3. To open the Warning page, click the Warning Page button.

20 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following Properties window has information about a warning


message:

The message describes the type of error that occurred.


If you are viewing the warning message for a point, you can view
further point derivation details.
To do this:
In the Warning page, select the Point Derivation tool.
The software generates an HTML report. The report
summarizes how the recomputation determined the calculated
position for a point. Any misclosure that the recomputation
determined was outside the tolerance set for the project appears
in red with a Flag icon.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 203


9 Viewing and Editing Data

Resolve or suppress all warning flags before exporting coordinates.


When you resolve an out-of-tolerance closure by disabling a bad
observation or renaming the point if the observation was to a different
physical point, the warning flag disappears. Table 9.11 shows the
warning messages that may appear.
Table 9.11 Warning messages that may appear

Flag on Warning message What it means


Point Out-of-Tolerance Closure There are multiple observations to a point, where the
(Recomputation) difference between the calculated position from each
observation is outside the tolerance set for the
project.
There is a keyed-in coordinate for the point and an
observation. The difference between the coordinate
and the position calculated from the observation is
outside the tolerance set for the project.
Point Out-of-Tolerance There are multiple observations to a point, where the
Observation difference between an observed position and the
(Recomputation) mean of the observed positions as determined by a
recomputation is outside the tolerance set for the
project.
Point High RMS (RTK) A high RMS was detected in the field and may have
been caused by bad initialization. Therefore, all points
measured using this initialization are flagged.
The high RMS may also have been caused by
obstructions such as tree foliage, so only the points
collected near the tree are suspect.
If you are confident in the initialization, you can
suppress the High RMS flags.

20 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

Table 9.11 Warning messages that may appear (Continued)

Flag on Warning message What it means


Observation Multiple failures One or more of the acceptance criteria specified has
(GPS Postprocessing)1 not been satisfied.
Observation High RMS The RMS of the active solution is outside the
(GPS Postprocessing)1 acceptance criteria.
Observation Low ratio The ratio of the variance of the second best solution
(GPS Postprocessing)1 with the variance of the best solution is outside the
acceptance criteria.
Observation High reference variance The error in the solution did not compare satisfactorily
(GPS Postprocessing)1 with the expected error.
1
After baseline processing, if you have the Baseline Processing module installed.

9.6.1 GPS Loop Closures


You can check the quality of, and identify any errors in, a set of GPS
observations within a network by performing loop closures and
viewing the Loop Closure report.
Use the failed loops sections of the Loop Closure report to identify:
loops where the misclosures are outside the specified tolerance
values
GPS observations that do not fit in the network
GPS station occupations for the baselines that do not fit in the
network.
To perform loop closures on your GPS network and generate the Loop
Closure report:
Select Reports / GPS Loop Closures Report.
For information on GPS loop closures, refer to the WAVE Baseline
Processing User Guide or the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 205


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.7 Editing Survey Data


During the inspection of the project, you identify problems with the
survey data. The following sections describe the methods you can use
to resolve these problems before you continue with the next task.

9.7.1 Changing the Status of Observations


By default, observations are always enabled. However, to determine
whether a recomputation will use GPS or terrestrial observations to
derive the calculated position of an observed point, change this
enabled status. You can do the following:
If you do not want an observation used to determine the position
of a point, disable it.
The Recompute report does not report on disabled observations.
If you only want an observation used if there are no other
observations or coordinates available, enable it as a check.
To change the status of an observation:
1. Select the observation. For more information, see Selecting
Entities, page 151.
2. Do one of the following:
Select the Edit Properties tool to open the Properties
window.
Click the Summary Page button to access the Summary
page, and then select the appropriate option from the Status
field.
Select Edit / Enable/Disable Observation.
Select Edit / Multiple Edit to open the Multiple Edit dialog.
In the Survey tab, select the Set observation status to check
box, and choose the appropriate option from the field.
To enable an observation as a check, use the Properties
window or the Multiple Edit dialog.

20 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

The appearance of the observation lines changes. For more


information about colors and status of lines, see Changing the
Recomputation Settings, page 32.
When your edits to the survey data could change the
coordinates for a point in the database, the Recompute icon
appears in the status bar.
3. To perform a recomputation, do one of the following:
Select Survey / Recompute.
Press >)@.
In the Survey view, right-click to access the shortcut menu,
and then select Recompute.
In the status bar, double click the Recompute icon.
The recomputation reapplies the observation to determine the new
calculated position for the point.
Note If the difference between the derived position and the position
calculated from an observation enabled as check is outside the
tolerance set for the project, then a warning flag is generated on the
point and the misclosure reported in the Recompute report.

9.7.2 Reversing the Direction of Observations


GPS and terrestrial observations flow out in the direction in which the
baseline was observed. For RTK observations, the direction will be
from the base to the rover. The direction of postprocessed Static and
FastStatic baselines are based on the positional qualities of the from
and to points. The direction is applied from the point with the higher
quality to the point with the lower quality. For terrestrial observations,
the direction will be from the instrument point to the target point.
A recomputation applies the observation in the direction that is stored
in the project. For more information, see Appendix B, Recomputation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 207


9 Viewing and Editing Data

You can reverse the direction of an observation so that a


recomputation applies the observation in the opposite directionthis
may change the calculated coordinates and qualities of the point.

 Warning If the point that you want the observation to flow out from does
not have a known position, the observation is not applied.

To reverse the direction of a GPS baseline, do the following:


1. Select the GPS observation.
For more information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.
2. Do one of the following:
Select Edit / Reverse Observation flowout.
Right-click to access the shortcut menu, and select Reverse
Observation Flowout.
When the edits to the survey data could change the coordinates
for a point in the database, the Recompute icon appears in
the status bar.
3. Perform a recomputation, as shown in step 3, page 207.
The recomputation reapplies the observation to flow out from the
opposite point.

20 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.8 Editing Multiple Entities at One Time


Use the Multiple Edit dialog to edit the survey- and CAD-related
properties of more than one entity in your current selection set at the
same time. This dialog lets you apply the same edits to a selection of
entities.
You can correct the antenna or instrument heights for a group of
stations if they have been incorrectly entered during setup. You can
also add a group of entities to a specific layer.
To access the Multiple Edit dialog:
1. Select the entities that you want to edit. For more information,
see Selecting Entities, page 151.
2. Select Edit / Multiple Edit. The following dialog appears:

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 209


9 Viewing and Editing Data

3. Do one of the following:


Select the Survey tab to edit the survey-related properties
of the selected entities.
Select the CAD tab to edit the CAD-related properties of
the selected entities.
Note You can edit more than one field from either tab at any time.

21 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following sections describe how to use the Multiple Edit dialog to
edit multiple entities for each property type. Not all options are
discussed, so for more information, refer to the Help.

9.8.1 Editing the Survey-Related Properties of Selected Entities


To edit the survey-related properties of the entities in the current
selection set, in the Multiple Edit dialog:
1. Make sure that the Survey tab is selected.
2. Select the check boxes to enable the common fields that you
want to edit. For example, if you want to change the status of
the selected observations, select the Set observation status to
check box and then the option that you want.
Note When you select a check box to edit a particular field, the
Trimble Geomatics Office software checks the selected entities. If it
finds that the fields are not used in the selected entities, it disables the
check box option.

Editing the antenna heights of the selected entities


If the antenna heights for a group of surveyed points have been
incorrectly entered in the field, you can select the points (for more
information, see Selecting Entities, page 151) and use the Multiple
Edit dialog to quickly correct them.
To do this, with the current selection set:
1. In the Survey tab, select the Set antenna height to check box.
The Change heights of size and New antenna height fields
become available. The Change heights of size field lists the
current antenna heights of the selected points. You can only
change the antenna heights with the selected values.

 Warning If you have selected points with different antenna heights, you
will get all antenna heights in your selection. Make sure that you change
the correct antenna heights.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 211


9 Viewing and Editing Data

2. From the Change heights of size list, select the antenna height
that you want to correct.
3. Enter the corrected antenna height value in the New Antenna
height field and click OK. The operation changes all of the
antenna heights to the correct values.
When the edits to the survey data could change the coordinates
for a point in the database, the Recompute icon appears in
the status bar.
4. Perform a recomputation, as shown in step 3, page 207.
The vectors are reapplied to the base and new antenna heights are used
to calculate the new position. For more information, see Appendix B,
Recomputation.

Editing the antenna details of multiple entities


To edit the antenna details of the selected points, in the Multiple Edit
dialog:
1. In the Survey tab, select the GPS Antenna details to check box.
The Antenna type and Measured to fields become available. The
Measured to field depends on the antenna type selected. If a
new antenna type is selected, this field is cleared.
2. Select the correct antenna type and measurement method from
the lists that you want to change.
3. Click OK.
The operation changes all of the antenna heights to the correct
values. When the edits to the survey data could change the
coordinates for a point in the database, the Recompute icon
appears in the status bar.
4. Perform a recomputation, as shown in step 3, page 207.

21 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.8.2 Editing the CAD-Related Properties of Selected Entities


To edit the CAD-related properties of the entities in the current
selection set, in the Multiple Edit dialog:
1. Select the CAD tab, as shown below:

2. Select the check boxes to enable the common fields that you
want to edit. For example, to assign the selected points to a
specific layer, select the Set layer to check box from the
Perform these edits to the selected points group.
3. Specify the values that you want applied to the selected entities.
For example, to add the points to the Utilities layer, select
Utilities or enter the layer name in the Set layer to field.
4. Click OK.
The software adds the selected points to the Utilities layer.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 213


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.9 Using the Data Analysis Tools


The following sections describe the tools that are available to help you
analyze your data. For example, you can check the inverse between
two points, or determine the extent of the survey area.

9.9.1 Viewing the Inverse Between Two Points


You can display the inverse to determine the difference between any
two points in the project. To do this:
1. Do one of the following:
Select Survey / Inverse.
Press >)@.
The following dialog appears and the pointer changes to
Measure mode:

You can use field fill-in to select the points defining the inverse
from the graphics window.
2. With the From field selected, click the starting point in the
graphics window.

21 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

A dotted line appears to show that the software will compute the
inverse as soon as you move the mouse pointer close to another
existing database point.
3. With the To field selected, click the end point in the graphics
window.

The Grid azimuth, Grid distance, and Delta elevation fields


display the inverse details. The dotted line becomes solid to
show the line that the inverse details refer to.
4. To view additional details on the inverse, click Detailed.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 215


9 Viewing and Editing Data

The Inverse dialog enlarges to display the Details group. The


Details group shows the forward and back geodetic azimuths
(computed along the normal section of the ellipsoid), the
ellipsoid and ground distances, and the delta ellipsoid height.
For information on each component, refer to the Help.

5. Click Send to report to generate a brief or detailed report of the


inverse depending on the display option used. The report is
stored as Inverse.html in the Reports folder.
6. To view the report, do one of the following:
Click Show report.
Select Reports / Inverse Report.

21 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

9.9.2 Measuring Positions Within the Graphics Window


You can measure the distance, azimuth, and any area from the
graphics window. This is useful if you want to quickly determine the
extent of the survey area. To do this:
1. Select Survey / Measure. The following dialog appears:

The pointer changes to Measure mode. You can use field fill-in
to click any position in the graphics window and define the
object being measured.
2. Click the positions in succession to define the object being
measured.
Note The Measure pointer snaps to any point that it goes near. To
avoid this, press >&WUO@ when using the pointer.
Once you have selected two or more positions, the cumulative
distance from the first selected point is shown in the Distance field.
The Azimuth field shows the azimuth between the last two selected
positions. The software reports the distances and azimuths according
to the display settings in the Units and Format tab of the Project
Properties dialog. For more information, see Chapter 3, Setting up a
Project.
With three or more points selected, the software shows the area of the
figure formed by closing back to the first point. The units of the
computed area vary depending on the distance display settings. For
more information, refer to the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 217


9 Viewing and Editing Data

 Tip If you click and drag a box over an area, the dialog fields show the
current azimuth, the cumulative distance from the first selected point, and
the area enclosed.

9.10 Viewing Note Records


Note records are non-graphical entities in the project. That is, they do
not appear, and they cannot be selected in the graphics window. If you
import a job from the Trimble Survey Controller containing
user-entered notes, you can use the Properties window to view them.
To select and view note records:
1. Do one of the following:
Choose Select / Selection Sets. Choose the name of the .dc
file that you have imported that contains the notes you
want to view.
Choose Select / By Query. From the list, select Notes.
2. Open the Properties window. The Properties window displays
all note entities with a Pencil icon.
3. Select the note that you want to view.
The following Properties window shows the note details:

21 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

 Tip To create a custom report to display all note records, select Note
records from the Report on field in the Define Report Format dialog. For
more information, see Appendix A, Custom Import, Export, and Report
Formats.

9.11 Viewing CAD Entities


Use the Properties window to view and edit the properties of CAD
entities in the selection that appear in the Plan view, such as:
lines
curves
arcs
text
annotations
The following sections describe how to use the Properties window to
view each type.

9.11.1 Linework (Lines, Arcs, Curves)


Use the Properties window to view the details of linework entities
such as lines, curves and arcs.
To view the details of a line, curve, or arc, in the Properties window:
1. Do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select an entity.
In the graphics window, select an entity. For information,
see Selecting Entities, page 151.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 219


9 Viewing and Editing Data

The following Properties window shows the details of a line:

2. To edit the layer or line style, select an option from the field or
enter a new value.
If a layer or line style has not been specified for a linetype, the
software uses the default settings.

 Tip To view the points that the linetype entity connects to, click the plus
(+) icon beside the entity. You can then click a point to view.

9.11.2 Text
To view the details of a text entity, in the Properties window:
1. Do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select a text
entity.
In the graphics window, select a text entity. For
information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.

22 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Viewing and Editing Data 9

The following Properties window shows the details of a


selected text entity:

2. To edit the properties of a text entity, select an option from the


field or enter a new value.
If you do not specify a layer or text style for a point, the
software uses the default settings.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 221


9 Viewing and Editing Data

9.11.3 Annotations
Use the Properties window to view the details on annotations that are
associated with points or line types in the project.
To view the details of an annotation, in the Properties window:
1. Do one of the following:
From the Properties window selection list, select an
annotation.
In the graphics window, select an annotation. For
information, see Selecting Entities, page 151.
The following Properties window shows annotation details:

The Text expression field shows the definition displayed for the
assigned entity. Any expressions enclosed in square brackets are
treated as field codes and are used to display information about
the entity. For example, [Feature code] will display the feature
code value for the point in the project. For more information,
see Appendix A, Custom Import, Export, and Report Formats.
2. To edit the properties of an annotation, select an option from the
field or enter a new value.

 Tip To view the entity associated with the annotation, click the plus (+)
icon beside the annotation. Then, click on the entity that you want to view
and edit.

22 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


CHAPTER

10
10 GPS Site Calibration
In this chapter:

Q Introduction
Q Selecting the calibration components
Q Selecting the calibration point pairs
Q Computing the calibration parameters
Q Analyzing the calibration parameters
Q Viewing a report
Q Applying the calibration
Q Using a GPS site calibration in future projects
10 GPS Site Calibration

10.1 Introduction
A GPS site calibration establishes the relationship between WGS-84
points collected by GPS receivers, and local grid positions on a local
map grid. The local map grid includes elevations above sea level, and
the GPS data includes WGS-84 heights.
Published coordinate systems and geoid models do not usually allow
for local variations in the projection. You can perform a GPS site
calibration to reduce these variations and obtain more accurate local
grid coordinates.
If you use data collected from terrestrial instruments only, you do not
need to perform a GPS site calibration.

10.2 Selecting the Calibration Components


To select which calibration parameters to include in the calibration
calculations, use the GPS Site Calibration dialog.
To access it:
Select Survey / GPS Site Calibration. The following dialog
appears:

22 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


GPS Site Calibration 10

Note If you perform an adjustment with the Network Adjustment


module, and compute adjustment transformation parameters, when
you access the dialog the following message appears:

Proceeding with this operation will remove the adjustment transformation parameters.

You can only use one set of parameters derived from either a
calibration or an adjustment. Network adjustment transformation
parameters cannot be transferred to the Trimble Survey Controller
software. If you want to transfer control points and a calibration to the
Trimble Survey Controller software and your project coordinate
system has network adjustment transformation parameters, you must
first perform a GPS site calibration. For more information, refer to
the topic Calibration and Adjustment Transformation Parameters in
the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 225


10 GPS Site Calibration

To select the calibration components to be calculated, use the


Calibration Components group in the dialog. You can calculate:
a datum transformation (seven-parameter or three-parameter)
an update of the default Transverse Mercator projection origin
(if applicable)
a horizontal adjustment
a vertical adjustment

10.2.1 Computing a Datum Transformation


If you are using a published coordinate system, a predefined datum
transformation is usually specified, for example, a three- or
seven-parameter transformation, a multiple regression definition, or a
Datum Grid file (NADCON). In these cases, it is unlikely that you will
require a different datum transformation, so make sure that the Datum
Transformation check box is clear. However, if there is no datum
transformation information available, or if you have reason to doubt
the available parameters, then compute a datum transformation.
To compute a datum transformation:
1. In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, select the Datum
transformation check box. The Three parameter and Seven
parameter options become available.
2. Select the option for the transformation that you want to
compute.
For more information, refer to the topics Three-Parameter
Transformation and Seven-Parameter Transformation in the Help.
Note This option is not available with projects that have the default
projection coordinate system, because the default projection is based
directly on the WGS-84 ellipsoid. This means that no datum
transformation is required.

22 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


GPS Site Calibration 10

10.2.2 Updating Default Projection Origin


The Update default projection origin check box in the GPS Site
Calibration dialog is only available if the current coordinate system is
the default Transverse Mercator projection.
As the default projection has neither a latitude and longitude origin,
nor a false northing and false easting defined, updating the origin
ensures that the origin of the projection is local; that is, it is close to
the survey data in your project.
To update the default projection origin using the first two-dimensional
point pair used:
Select the Update default projection origin check box.
If you are carrying out a GPS calibration on a project that already has
the default projection defined, clear this check box. The default
projection definition does not change.

10.2.3 Computing a Horizontal Adjustment


A horizontal adjustment is a plane transformation consisting of:
translations in the north/south and east/west directions
a rotation around a defined origin
a scale factor
The software computes transformation parameters using least-squares
methods to find the transformation that gives the adjustment
parameters that, when applied to GPS positions, best fit the control
grid coordinates. The horizontal adjustment minimizes any residual
error between the control grid coordinates and the grid coordinates
calculated from the GPS positions.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 227


10 GPS Site Calibration

To include a horizontal adjustment:


1. In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, select the Horizontal
adjustment check box. The Set scale factor to 1 check box
becomes available.
2. To force the scale in the computed calibration to one, select this
check box.

 Tip Initially, compute a horizontal adjustment without the scale factor set
to one. This determines if the computed scale factor is close to one. If the
computed scale factor is not close to 1, check the selected calibration
point pairs.

10.2.4 Computing a Vertical Adjustment


A vertical adjustment is an inclined plane adjustment that consists of:
a vertical shift at a defined origin
inclinations in the north and east directions.
This requires three 3-dimensional calibration point pairs. The
parameters for this adjustment are computed using least squares
methods. The least squares calculation finds an adjustment plane that
best fits the elevations derived from the GPS heights with the control
point elevations. With one 3-dimensional calibration point pair, only
the vertical shift parameter can be computed. If there are two
3-dimensional control point pairs available, the system defines a
correction plane that exactly fits these pairs.
If the project uses a geoid model, then the vertical adjustment is
computed and applied on top of the geoid model corrections.
To include a vertical adjustment:
In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, select the Vertical
adjustment check box.

22 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


GPS Site Calibration 10

10.3 Selecting the Calibration Point Pairs


Use the Point List dialog to select the calibration point pairs you want
to use to calculate the GPS site calibration parameters. A calibration
point pair consists of:
a GPS point (a point with a GPS position or derived from GPS
data)
a grid point (not a GPS derived point), which is normally a
control point (or an adjusted point)
Note If a point is derived from a grid position and a GPS vector, it
cannot be selected as a GPS or grid point for calibration.
As you select or specify points for inclusion in the point list, the
Trimble Geomatics Office software checks that each GPS point has a
GPS derivation, and that each grid point does not have a GPS
derivation. When a point does not conform to these requirements, an
error message appears.
Trimble recommends that you use at least four 3-dimensional control
point pairs. This is because using four or more control point pairs
provides redundancy in the results.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 229


10 GPS Site Calibration

10.3.1 Selecting Calibration Point Pairs


1. Select Survey / GPS Site Calibration. The GPS Site Calibration
dialog appears.
2. Click Point List. The following dialog appears:

Use it to specify the calibration point pairs from which the


calibration parameters are computed.
3. In the first GPS Point field, to select the first GPS point you
want to use in the calibration, do one of the following:
Use field fill-in and click an existing GPS point.
Enter the name of the GPS point.
Expand the GPS Point field (click the plus sign next to the
field) and enter the WGS-84 latitude, WGS-84 longitude,
and WGS-84 height in the appropriate fields. The latitude
and longitude position is used in the calibration
computation, but a GPS point is not added to the database.
A box appears on the GPS point in the graphics window.

23 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


GPS Site Calibration 10

4. Complete the calibration point pair. To do this, use one of the


following methods to select the grid point associated with the
GPS point you selected in the previous step:
Use field fill-in and click an existing grid point.
Enter the name of the grid point.
Expand the Grid Point field and enter the northing, easting,
and elevation in the appropriate fields. The northing and
easting position is used in the calibration computation, but
a grid point is not added to the database.
The following occurs:
A cross appears on the grid point in the graphics window.
A line appears between the GPS point and the grid point.
The Type field is filled in.
If the calibration point pair is three-dimensional, the Type
field is set to Horz and Vert. If you do not want to use the
calibration point pair in the vertical adjustment
computation, change the type to Horizontal. If you do not
want to use the calibration point pair in the horizontal
adjustment computation, change the type to Vertical.
If the calibration point pair is two-dimensional, the Type
field is set to Horizontal. You cannot change this value
because all other types are invalid.
If the calibration point pair is one-dimensional, the Type
field is set to Vertical. You cannot change the Type field as
all other options are invalid.
Note If you have a point defined with an underlying grid and a
WGS-84 point, the point list is populated with the grid point
when you include a GPS point.
5. Repeat step 1 to step 4 to select all of the calibration point pairs
that you want to use in the calibration.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 231


10 GPS Site Calibration

 Tip The Statistics group shows the scale factor, vertical adjustment
inclination, and residuals for the calibration, based on the data entered in
the point list. Use these statistics to ensure that the data you have entered
is correct.

6. Once you have entered all of the calibration point pairs you
want to use, click Close. The GPS Site Calibration dialog
returns.

 Tip To select all of the calibration points in the graphics window that are
defined in the point list, choose Select / Calibration Points.

10.4 Computing the Calibration Parameters


Once you select the calibration point pairs for the GPS site calibration,
the Compute button in the GPS Site Calibration dialog becomes
available. When you click this button, the Trimble Geomatics Office
software uses the selected calibration point pairs to compute the GPS
site calibration parameters.
You can perform any number of GPS site calibrations in a project. If
you apply a new calibration to a project, the coordinate system is
updated with the new calibration parameters, and all points in the
database are updated with the new coordinate system values.

23 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


GPS Site Calibration 10

10.5 Analyzing the Calibration Parameters


When GPS site calibration parameters have been computed, a
summary of the quality of the calibration parameters appears in the
Computation summary group. Use the summary to confirm that the
computed calibration is valid.
Table 10.1 shows the computation summary parameters:
Table 10.1 Computation summary group parameters

Field Description
Horizontal Shows the computed scale factor for the Horizontal
adjustment adjustment. If you select the Set scale factor to 1 check
scale factor box, the field displays one. Use it to confirm that the
computed scale factor is close to one. If it is not, there is a
problem with one or more of the calibration point pairs.
Max vertical Shows the maximum inclination for the computed height
adjustment adjustment based on the computed Slope north and Slope
inclination east values. Check that this value is consistent with
accepted values for your area.
Max horizontal Shows the maximum residuals for the last computation
residual and carried out. The software warns you if the maximum
Max vertical horizontal residual error is greater than the value specified
residual in the registry settings. Check that these values are within
expected ranges; normally in the order of centimeters.

Note To change the maximum error and maximum iteration count,


use the Windows Registry on your computer. For more information,
refer to the topic Changing Calibration Settings Using the Registry in
the Help.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 233


10 GPS Site Calibration

If any of the fields in the Computation summary group of the GPS Site
Calibration dialog are not within expected ranges, use one of the
following methods to find the problem calibration point pairs:
Examine the calibration point pairs.
To find an error in a GPS site calibration:
Repeat the GPS site calibration procedure but leave out a
different point pair each time. When the computation
summary values are what you expect, this means that you
have found the problem pair.
Check that the grid points have the correct coordinates.
Check that you have the best known coordinates for the base
point of your GPS survey. If the errors in the calibration are
small, they may be caused by errors in the observations. An
error in the observation of up to one part per million (1 ppm)
can be introduced by each 10 m (33 ft) of error in the base
coordinates. If you reobserve with a more accurate base
position, you may improve the observations and hence the
calibration results.
If you locate an error in one of the calibration point pairs, fix the error
and recalibrate. If you cannot fix the error, delete the calibration point
pair from the point list and recalibrate.

23 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


GPS Site Calibration 10

10.6 Viewing a Report


To view a report of the last computed GPS site calibration:
In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, click Report.
A detailed report of the calibration computation, named
Calibration.html, appears in the default HTML viewer on your
computer.
Use the report to inspect the individual calibration parameters. The
report is saved in the projects Reports folder. When you recalibrate, a
new report overwrites the old one.

10.6.1 Calibration Report


The Calibration report includes:
Project details
Datum transformation parameters
Updated default projection definition
Horizontal adjustment parameters
Vertical adjustment parameters
Geoid model definition
Residual differences between GPS and known coordinates
The following sections describe each part of the Calibration report and
include report samples where appropriate.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 235


10 GPS Site Calibration

The Project Details section


Figure 10.1 shows the Project Details section. This section shows the
project details, including the project name and the coordinate system
used.

Figure 10.1 Project Details section of a Calibration report

The Datum Transformation Parameters section


Figure 10.2 shows the Datum Transformation Parameters section.
This section shows the datum transformation method used in the
calibration and the computed parameters.

Figure 10.2 Datum Transformation section of a Calibration report

The Updated Default Projection (Transverse Mercator)


Definition section
The Updated Default Project (Transverse Mercator) Definition
section shows the updated projection origin values (when the Update
default projection origin option has been selected).

23 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


GPS Site Calibration 10

The Horizontal Adjustment Parameters section


Figure 10.3 shows the Horizontal Adjustment Parameters section.
This section shows the horizontal adjustment parameters computed
from the calibration.

Figure 10.3 Horizontal Adjustment Parameters section of a Calibration report

The Vertical Adjustment Parameters section


Figure 10.4 shows the Vertical Adjustment Parameters section. This
section shows the vertical adjustment parameters computed from the
calibration.

Figure 10.4 Vertical Adjustment Parameters section of a Calibration report

The Geoid Model Definition section


The Geoid Model Definition section shows the name of the geoid
model used for the project.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 237


10 GPS Site Calibration

The Residual Differences Between GPS and Known


Coordinates section
The Residual Differences Between GPS and Known Coordinates
section shows the residual differences between the point pairs used in
the calibration. Use this section to identify suspect point pairs.
This section includes:
Summary
Point residuals
Figure 10.5 shows the Summary subsection. This subsection shows the
maximum residuals and the associated GPS points.

Figure 10.5 Residual Differences Between GPS and Known Coordinate Summary section of
a Calibration report

The Point Residuals subsection shows all of the point pairs used in the
calibration, and the residual differences. Any point pairs that have
residuals greater than the value specified in the registry setting on your
computer are shown in red.

23 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


GPS Site Calibration 10

10.7 Applying the Calibration


To apply the last computed GPS site calibration:
In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, click OK.
The Trimble Geomatics Office software updates the project coordinate
system with the calibration parameters.
To view the coordinate system details:
1. Select File / Project Properties. The Project Properties dialog
appears.
2. In the Coordinate System tab, click Details. The Project
Coordinate System Details dialog appears.
3. Select the Adjustment tab to view the horizontal and vertical
GPS site calibration parameters.
The software performs a recomputation and updates the database with
the new calibration parameters.

10.8 Using a GPS Site Calibration in Future Projects


If you plan to do future fieldwork in the immediate area, save the
coordinate system (which includes the calibration parameters) as a
site. You can then use the site as the coordinate system for future
projects.
To do this:
1. In the GPS Site Calibration dialog, click Save as Site. The
Save as Site dialog appears.
2. Enter a name for the site and then click OK.
The site is saved to the coordinate system database.
To use a saved GPS site calibration (as a site) in another project, make
sure that the project area is within the points used in the GPS site
calibration.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 239


10 GPS Site Calibration

If you select the site for a new project that is within the area covered
by the points used in the original calibration, you do not need to carry
out another GPS site calibration.
For example, in Figure 10.6, save the GPS site calibration as a site in
project A, then use the site in project B. However, do not use the site
in project C because the area is outside the points used in the GPS site
calibration.

Points used in
calibration in
Project A
Project C area
Project B area

Figure 10.6 Site used for other projects

24 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary
This section explains some of the terms used in this manual.

1-sigma One standard error from the mean.

a posteriori errors The a priori errors multiplied by the standard error of unit
weight (reference factor) resulting from a network
adjustment.

a priori errors Errors estimated for observations prior to a network


adjustment.

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and


Transportation Officials

accuracy The closeness of a measurement to the actual (true) value


of the quantity being measured.

adjusted values Values derived from observed data (measurement) by


applying a process of eliminating errors in that data in a
network adjustment.

adjustment The process of determining and applying corrections to


observations for the purpose of reducing errors in a
network adjustment.

adjustment When the network adjustment has met the defined


convergence residual tolerance or last ditch residual tolerance within a
defined number of iterations.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 2 41


Glossary

adjustment datum The datum used in the current network adjustment


iteration. The Trimble Geomatics Office software lets you
select either the project datum or WGS-84.

adjustment styles Trimble default and user-defined settings for a network


adjustment.

algebraic sign The sign (+ or -) associated with a value which designates


it as a positive or negative number.

algorithm A set of rules for solving a problem in a finite number of


steps.

almanac Data transmitted by a GPS satellite that includes orbit


information on all the satellites, clock correction, and
atmospheric delay parameters. The almanac facilitates
rapid SV acquisition. The orbit information is a subset of
the ephemeris data with reduced precision.

ambiguity The unknown integer number of cycles of the


reconstructed carrier phase contained in an unbroken set
of measurements. The receiver counts the radio waves
(from the satellite as they pass the antenna) to a high
degree of accuracy. However, it has no information on the
number of waves to the satellite at the time it started
counting. This unknown number of wavelengths between
the satellite and the antenna is the ambiguity. Also known
as integer ambiguity or integer bias.

annotation A piece of text that describes another database record. To


select and edit annotations, use the Properties window. An
annotation is liveany fields are re-expanded whenever
the parent entity changes.

24 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

antenna height The height of a GPS antenna phase center above the point
being observed.
The uncorrected antenna height is measured from the
observed point to a designated point on the antenna, then
corrected to the true vertical manually or automatically in
the software.

antenna phase The phase center for a GPS antenna is neither a physical
correction nor a stable point. The phase center for a GPS antenna
changes with respect to the changing direction of the
signal from a satellite. Most of the phase center variation
depends on satellite elevation. Modeling this variation in
antenna phase center location allows a variety of antenna
types to be used in a single survey. Antenna phase center
corrections are not as critical when two of the same
antenna are used since common errors cancel out.

Anti-Spoofing (AS) A feature that allows the U.S. Department of Defense to


transmit an encrypted Y-code in place of P-code. Y-code is
intended to be useful only to authorized (primarily
military) users. AS is used to deny the full precision of
GPS to civilian users.

APC Antenna Phase Center


The electronic center of the antenna. It often does not
correspond to the physical center of the antenna. The radio
signal is measured at the APC.
In the Properties window the height of a point may be the
elevation of the APC. If the height is specified as APC, it
is the height of the APCnot the ground height.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 243


Glossary

autonomous A mode of operation in which a GPS receiver computes


positioning position fixes in real time from satellite data alone,
without reference to data supplied by a base station.
Autonomous positioning is the least precise positioning
procedure a GPS receiver can perform, yielding position
fixes that are precise to 100 meters horizontal RMS
when Selective Availability is in effect, and to 1020
meters when it is not. Also known as absolute positioning
and point positioning.

azimuth A surveying observation used to measure the angle


formed by a horizontal baseline and geodetic north. When
applied to GPS observations, it refers to a normal section
azimuth.

base station An antenna and receiver set up on a known location. It is


used for real-time kinematic (RTK) or differential
surveys. Data can be recorded at the base station for later
postprocessing. A Trimble base station consists of a
receiver in Base Station mode used with the Trimble
Reference Station (TRS) software or the Universal
Reference Station (URS) software.
In GPS surveying practice, you observe and compute
baselines (that is, the position of one receiver relative to
another). The base station acts as the position from which
all other unknown positions are derived.

baseline The position of a point relative to another point. In GPS


surveying, this is the position of one receiver relative to
another. When the data from these two receivers is
combined, the result is a baseline comprising a
three-dimensional vector between the two stations.

24 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

baseline processor A computer program that computes baseline solutions


from satellite measurements. It may run as a postprocessor
on a personal computer, or as a real-time processor in a
receiver. WAVE (Weighted Ambiguity Vector Estimator)
is Trimbles baseline processor.

baud A unit of data transfer speed (from one binary digital


device to another) used when describing serial
communications.

bivariate Mathematical function describing the behavior of


two-dimensional random errors in error ellipses for:
northing/easting
latitude/longitude
X/Y

CAD styles CAD styles define the appearance of points, lines, arcs,
curves, text, and annotations in a project. A style, for
example, can be made up of a symbol, line type, color, or
font. Style definitions are stored in a project.
To have styles available for a number of projects, define
the styles in a template project.

calibrated site A site definition uses an existing coordinate system


definition plus correction transformation. This makes the
best fit for GPS data in a specific area (or site). The extra
correction transformations are required because a
coordinate system is designed to apply over a very large
area. It does not allow for variations in the local
coordinates.
You need to have new work fit with the existing control,
so the extra correction transformations will correct for
these local variations. Extra corrections are only valid
over a limited area. This explains the site terminology.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 245


Glossary

The Trimble Geomatics Office software can compute the


extra transformations required to fit to local control and
save these definitions in the coordinate system database.

calibration WGS-84 coordinates (latitude/longitude/ellipsoid height)


coordinates generated from a minimally constrained network
adjustment of your GPS observation, then saved for later
use in a GPS site calibration.
The calibration coordinates are used as the GPS observed
coordinates that are associated with the grid coordinates
of a particular point when performing a calibration.

Cartesian See Earth-Centered-Earth-Fixed Cartesian coordinates.


coordinates

chi-square test An overall statistical test of the network adjustment. It is a


test of the sum of the weight squares of the residuals, the
number of degrees of freedom and a critical probability of
95 percent or greater.
The purpose of this test is to reject or to accept the
hypothesis that the predicted errors have been accurately
estimated.

clock offset The constant difference in the time reading between two
clocks. In GPS, usually refers to offset between SV clocks
and the clock in the users receiver.

closure Agreement between measured and known parts of a


network.

CMR Compact Measurement Record


A satellite measurement message that is broadcast by the
base receiver and used by real-time kinematic (RTK)
surveys to calculate an accurate baseline vector from the
base to the rover.

24 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

Coarse Acquisition A pseudorandom noise (PRN) code modulated onto an L1


(C/A) code signal. This code helps the receiver compute the distance
from the satellite.

code The GPS code is a pseudorandom noise (PRN) code that


is modulated onto the GPS carrier signals.
The C/A code is unclassified and is available for use by
civilian applications.
The P code is also known and unclassified, but may be
encrypted for national defense purposes.
Code measurements are the basis of GPS navigation and
positioning. Code also is used in conjunction with carrier
phase measurements to obtain more accurate survey
quality baseline solutions.

component One of the three surveying observations used to define a


three-dimensional baseline between two control points.
The same baseline can be defined by azimuth, delta
height, and distance (in ellipsoid coordinates); by delta X,
delta Y, and delta Z (in Earth Centered Cartesian
coordinates); and by delta north, delta east, and delta up
(in local plane coordinates).

constellation A specific set of satellites used in calculating positions:


three satellites for 2D fixes, four satellites for 3D fixes.
All satellites visible to a GPS receiver at one time. The
optimum constellation is the constellation with the lowest
PDOP. See also PDOP.

constrained To hold (fix) a quantity (observation and coordinate) as


true in a network adjustment.

constraint External limitations imposed upon the adjustable


quantities (observations and coordinates) in a network
adjustment.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 247


Glossary

control point A monumented point to which coordinates have been, or


are in the process of being, assigned by the use of
surveying observations.

conventional An observation in the field obtained using a total station


observation or theodolite.

coordinate system A set of transformations that allow GPS positions (in the
WGS-84 ellipsoid) to be transformed to projection
coordinates with elevations above the Geoid.
It consists of a datum transformation, a geoid model
allocation, and a coordinate projection definition.
The datum transformation is defined in the coordinate
system database. It includes the definition of the datum on
which the coordinate projection is based.
An existing geoid model can be assigned to the coordinate
system, but it is also possible to specify a constant geoidal
separation rather than using a geoid model. Use the
Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility to define
geoid models in the coordinate system database.
You can allocate some coordinate projection types to a
coordinate system (for example, Transverse Mercator or
Lambert One Parallel). Different countries and regions
use different projection types to achieve optimum results
(that is, minimum distortion) in the projection
coordinates. The coordinate projection methods project
latitude and longitude values on the appropriate datum to
Cartesian coordinate values. The elevations for the
projection coordinates are achieved using the geoid model
assigned to the coordinate system.
The Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility lets you
view, edit, and add to the coordinate system definitions
supplied with the Trimble Geomatics Office software.

24 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

correlated Said of two or more observations (or derived quantities)


which have at least one common source of error.

covariance A measure of the correlation of errors between two


observations or derived quantities. Also refers to an
off-diagonal term (that is, not a variance) in a
variance-covariance matrix.

covariance matrix A matrix that defines the variance and covariance of an


observation. The elements of the diagonal are the variance
and all elements on either side of the diagonal are the
covariance.

covariant values As used by the Trimble Geomatics Office software, this is


the publication of the propagated (computed) a posteriori
errors in azimuth, distance, and height between pairs of
control points resulting from a network adjustment. The
term covariant indicates that this computation involves the
use of covariant terms in the variance-covariance matrix
of adjusted control points.

current view You can open more than one view onto the database using
the Window / New Window command. Each of these views
can have different view settings. The current view is the
view that has focus and this is identified by the use of the
active title bar.

cycle slip An interruption in a receivers lock onto a satellites radio


signals. A cycle slip requires the re-estimation of integer
ambiguity terms during baseline processing.

data logging The process of recording satellite data in a file stored in


the receiver, on a data collector running the Trimble
Survey Controller software, or on a survey data card.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 249


Glossary

data message A message, included in the GPS signal, that reports on the
location and health of the satellites as well as any clock
correction. It includes information about the health of
other satellites as well as their approximate position.

datum A mathematical model of the earth designed to fit part or


all of the geoid. It is defined by the relationship between
an ellipsoid and a point on the topographic surface
established as the origin of the datum. It is usually referred
to as a geodetic datum.
The size and shape of an ellipsoid, and the location of the
center of the ellipsoid with respect to the center of the
earth, usually define world geodetic datums.

datum defect Unknown discrepancies between two sets of coordinates


which can only be rectified by the use of a datum
transformation as part of a network adjustment.

datum Defines the transformation that is used to transform the


transformation coordinates of a point defined in one datum to coordinates
in a different datum.
There are a number of different datum transformation
methods supported by the Trimble Geomatics Office
software:
Seven-Parameter
Three-Parameter (also referred to as Molodensky)
Multiple Regression
Datum Grid
Datum transformations usually convert data collected in
the WGS-84 datum (by GPS methods) onto datums used
for surveying and mapping purposes in individual regions
and countries.

25 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

de-correlate To remove the covariances between observations. This


may be done through elaborate orthogonal
transformations, or by computing separate horizontal and
vertical adjustments.

deflection of the The angular difference between the upward direction of


vertical the plumb line (vertical) and the perpendicular (normal) to
the ellipsoid.

degrees of freedom A measure of the redundancy in a network.

delta elevation The difference in elevation between two points.

delta height The vertical component in the Trimble Geomatics Office


softwares expression of GPS baselines. It is the difference
in height or change of height.

delta N, delta E, delta Coordinate differences expressed in a Local Geodetic


U Horizon coordinate system.

delta X, delta Y, delta Coordinate differences expressed in a Cartesian


Z coordinate system.

differential The precise measurement of the relative position of two


positioning receivers that are tracking the same satellites
simultaneously.

DOP Dilution of Precision


An indicator of the quality of a GPS position. It takes
account of each satellites location relative to the other
satellites in the constellation, and their geometry in
relation to the GPS receiver. A low DOP value indicates a
higher probability of accuracy.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 251


Glossary

Standard DOPs for GPS applications are:


PDOP Position (three coordinates)
HDOP Horizontal (two horizontal coordinates)
RDOP
VDOP Vertical (height only)
TDOP Time (clock offset only)

Doppler shift The apparent change in frequency of a signal caused by


the relative motion of satellites and the receiver.

double differencing An arithmetic method of differencing carrier phases


simultaneously measured by two receivers tracking the
same satellites. This method removes the satellite and
receiver clock errors.

DTM Digital Terrain Model


An electronic representation of terrain in three-
dimensions.

dual-frequency A type of receiver that uses both L1 and L2 signals from


GPS satellites. A dual-frequency receiver can compute
more precise position fixes over longer distances and
under more adverse conditions because it compensates for
ionospheric delays.

Earth-Centered- A Cartesian coordinate system used by the WGS-84


Earth-Fixed (ECEF) reference frame. In this coordinate system, the center of
the system is at the earth's center of mass. The z axis is
coincident with the mean rotational axis of the earth and
the x axis passes through 0 N and 0 E. The y axis is
perpendicular to the plane of the x and z axes.

easting Eastward reading of grid values. Left to right on a grid


(X-axis).

25 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

elevation The height above mean sea level or the vertical distance
above the geoid. Elevation is sometimes referred to as the
orthometric height.

elevation mask An angle which is normally set to 13 degrees. If you track


satellites from above this angle, you usually avoid
interference caused by buildings, trees, and multipath
errors.
Trimble recommends that you do not track satellites from
below 13 degrees.

ellipsoid A mathematical model of the earth formed by rotating an


ellipse around its minor axis. For ellipsoids that model the
earth, the minor axis is the polar axis, and the major axis is
the equatorial axis.
You define an ellipsoid by specifying the lengths of both
axes, or by specifying the length of the major axis and the
flattening.
Two quantities define an ellipsoid; these are usually given
as the length of the semi-major axis, a, and the flattening,
(a b )
f = ----------------
a
where b is the length of the semi-minor axis.

ellipsoid distance As used in the Trimble Geomatics Office software, it is


the length of the normal section between two points.
Ellipsoid distance is not the same as the geodesic distance.

ellipsoid height The distance, measured along the normal, from the
surface of the ellipsoid to a point.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 253


Glossary

entities Primary graphical elements that you can view and select
from the graphics window.
Entities available in the Trimble Geomatics Office
software are points, lines, arcs, curves, text, and
annotations.

ephemeris A set of data that describes the position of a celestial


object as a function of time. Each GPS satellite
periodically transmits a broadcast ephemeris describing its
predicted positions through the near future, uploaded by
the Control Segment. Postprocessing programs can also
use a precise ephemeris that describes the exact positions
of a satellite in the past.

epoch The measurement interval of a GPS receiver. The epoch


varies according to the survey type:
For real-time surveys it is set at one second. For
postprocessed surveys it can be set to a rate of between
one second and one minute

epoch interval The measurement interval used by a GPS receiver; also


called a cycle.

error The difference between the measured value of a quantity


and its true value. Surveying errors are generally divided
into three categories: blunders, systematic errors, and
random errors. Least squares analysis is used to detect and
eliminate blunders and systematic errors, and least squares
adjustment is used to measure and properly distribute
random error.

error ellipse A coordinate error ellipse is a graphical representation of


the magnitude and direction of the error of network
adjusted points.

25 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

events A record of the occurrence of an event, such as the closing


of a photogrammetric cameras shutter. A GPS receiver
can log an event mark containing the time of the event and
an alphanumeric comment entered through the keypad to
describe the event. An event can be triggered through the
keypad or by an electrical signal input on one of the
receivers ports.

FastStatic A method of GPS surveying using occupations of up to 20


minutes to collect GPS raw data, then postprocessing to
achieve sub-centimeter precisions. Typically the
occupation times vary based on the number of satellites
(SVs) in view:
4 SVs take 20 minutes*
5 SVs take 15 minutes*
6 or more SVs take 8 minutes*
(*collected at a 15 second epoch rate)

Feature and A text file that contains the definitions of feature codes,
Attribute Library attributes, CAD styles, and control codes.
(*.fcl) file

feature codes Descriptive words or abbreviations that describe the


features you see.

field codes Special instructions that tell the Trimble Geomatics Office
software to insert information into reports, files, and
annotations.
Field codes are used to handle the transfer of database
data in ASCII import/export/report operations.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 255


Glossary

final solution When postprocessing is used to generate GPS vectors,


particularly for static solutions, the baseline processor
steps through different solutions using a variety of
processing techniques and combinations of GPS
measurements. In general each subsequent solution is
better than the previous one. The final solution provides
the best estimate of the GPS vector between two points.

fixed See constrained.

fixed coordinates Point coordinates that do not move when performing a


network adjustment.

fixed solution A solution obtained when the baseline processor is able to


resolve the integer ambiguity search with enough
confidence to select one set of integers over another. It is
called a fixed solution because the ambiguities are all
fixed from their estimated float values to their proper
integer values.

flattening A mathematical expression of the relative lengths of the


major and minor axes of an ellipsoid.

flattening inverse An expression of the flattening that is easier to read and


edit.

float solution A solution obtained when the baseline processor is unable


to resolve the integer ambiguity search with enough
confidence to select one set of integers over another. It is
called a float solution because the ambiguity includes a
fractional part and is non-integer.

free adjustment Performing a network adjustment in which no point


(coordinate) is constrained. The network adjustment uses
inner constraints.

frequency The size and spread of residuals in a data set. Graphically


distribution shown in histograms.

25 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

fully constrained A network adjustment in which all points in the network


which are part of a larger control network are held fixed to
their published coordinate values. Used to merge smaller
with larger control networks and old to newer networks.

GDOP Geometric Dilution of Precision


The relationship between errors in user position and time,
and errors in satellite range. See also DOP.

geodetic azimuth The angle between the geodetic meridian and the tangent
to the geodesic line of the observer, measured in the plane
perpendicular to the ellipsoid normal of the observer.
Clockwise from north.

geodetic datum A mathematical model designed to fit part or all of the


geoid. It is defined by the relationship between an
ellipsoid and a point on the topographic surface
established as the origin of a datum.The size and shape of
an ellipsoid and the location of the center of the ellipsoid
with respect to the center of the earth define world
geodetic datums.
Various datums have been established to suit particular
regions. For example, European maps are often based on
the European datum of 1950 (ED-50). Maps of the United
States are often based on the North American Datum of
1927 or 1983 (NAD-27, NAD-83). All GPS coordinates
are based on the WGS-84 datum surface.

geographic Latitude, longitude, and ellipsoid height.


(geodetic)
coordinates

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 257


Glossary

geoid The surface of gravitational equipotential that closely


approximates mean sea level. It is not a uniform
mathematical shape, but is an irregular figure with an
overall shape similar to an ellipsoid.
Generally, the elevations of points are measured with
reference to the geoid. However, points fixed by GPS
methods have heights established in the WGS-84 datum (a
mathematical figure).
The relationship between the WGS-84 datum and the
geoid must be determined by observation, as there is no
single mathematical definition that can describe the
relationship. You must use conventional survey methods
to observe the elevation above the geoid, then compare the
results with the height above the WGS-84 ellipsoid at the
same point.
By gathering a large number of observations of the
separation between the geoid and the WGS-84 datum
(geoidal separation), grid files of the separation values can
be established. This allows the interpolation of the geoidal
separation at intermediate positions. Files containing these
grids of geoidal separations are referred to as geoid
models. Given a WGS-84 position that falls within the
extents of a geoid model, the model can return the
interpolated geoidal separation at this position.

geoid model A mathematical representation of the geoid for a specific


area, or for the whole earth. The software uses the geoid
model to generate geoid separations for your points in the
network.

25 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

geoid observation A geoid separation, with its associated error, extracted


from a geoid model. The Trimble Geomatics Office
software network adjustment treats them as in the same
way as any observation with an associated error. As the
adjustment progresses the observations will become
adjusted geoid observations.

geoid separation The distance between the ellipsoid and geoid at a given
point.

geomatics The design, collection, storage, analysis, display, and


retrieval of spatial information. The collection of spatial
information can be from a variety of sources, including
GPS and terrestrial methods. Geomatics integrates
traditional surveying with new technology-driven
approaches, making geomatics useful for a vast number of
applications.

GPS Global Positioning System


GPS is based on a constellation of 24 satellites orbiting
the earth at a very high altitude.

GPS baseline A three-dimensional measurement between a pair of


stations for which simultaneous GPS data has been
collected and processed with differencing techniques.
Represented as delta X, delta Y, and delta Z; or azimuth,
distance, and delta height.

GPS observations A GPS baseline with its associated errors. As the


adjustment progresses the observations become adjusted
GPS observations.

GPS raw data The data collected by a GPS receiver for the purpose of
processing at a later time. It can be in the form of a .dat
file (Trimble raw data file format) or a RINEX file.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 259


Glossary

GPS time A measure of time used by the NAVSTAR GPS system.


GPS time is based on Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)
but does not add periodic leap seconds to correct for
changes in the earths period of rotation.

grid A two-dimensional horizontal rectangular coordinate


system, such as a map projection.

grid conversion The conversion between geographic and map projection


coordinates.

grid distance The distance between two points that is expressed in


mapping projection coordinates.

ground distance The distance (horizontal distance with curvature applied)


between two ground points.

HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision

height measurement A measuring tool supplied with an external GPS antenna


rod and used for measuring the height of the antenna above a
point.

HI Height of instrument.
Synonymous with antenna heights for GPS.

histogram A graphical display of the size and distribution of


residuals in a network adjustment.

horizontal A point with horizontal coordinate accuracy only. The


control point elevation or ellipsoid height is of a lower order of
accuracy or is unknown.

horizontal distance The distance between two points, computed horizontally


from the elevation of either point.

horizontal position A point with horizontal coordinates only.

26 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

independent Subnetworks, observations, and control points not


connected by geometry or errors. This term is the opposite
of correlated.

inner constraint A network adjustment computed without fixing any point


coordinates. The Trimble Geomatics Office software uses
the centroid of the network as an inner constraint.

integer ambiguity The whole number of cycles in a carrier phase


pseudorange between the GPS satellite and the GPS
receiver.

integer search GPS baseline processing, whether real-time or


postprocessed, requires fixed integer solutions for the best
possible results. The software which processes the GPS
measurements used to derive a baseline does an integer
search to obtain a fixed integer solution. The search
involves trying various combinations of integer values
and selecting the best results.

iono free Ionospheric free solution (IonoFree)


A solution that uses a combination of GPS measurements
to model and remove the effects of the ionosphere on the
GPS signals. This solution is often used for high-order
control surveying, particularly when observing long
baselines.

ionosphere The band of charged particles 80 to 120 miles above the


earths surface. It affects the accuracy of GPS
measurements if you measure long baselines using single-
frequency receivers.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 261


Glossary

ionospheric The time delay caused by the ionosphere varies with


modeling respect to the frequency of the GPS signals and affects
both the L1 and L2 signals differently. When dual
frequency receivers are used the carrier phase
observations for both frequencies can be used to model
and eliminate most of the ionospheric effects. When dual
frequency measurements are not available an ionospheric
model broadcast by the GPS satellites can be used to
reduce ionospheric affects. The use of the broadcast
model, however, is not as effective as the use of dual
frequency measurements.

iteration A complete set of adjustment computations that includes


the formation of the observation equations, normal
equations, coordinate adjustments, and computation of
residuals.

kinematic surveying A method of GPS surveying using short Stop and Go


occupations, while maintaining lock on at least four
satellites. Can be done in real time or postprocessed to
centimeter precisions.

known point Known point is used in conjunction with kinematic


initialization initialization. If two known points are available, the
baseline processor can calculate an inverse between the
two points and derive an initialization vector. This
initialization vector, with known baseline components, is
used to help solve for the integer ambiguity. If the
processor is able to successfully resolve this ambiguity a
fixed integer solution is possible, yielding the best
solutions for kinematic surveys.

L1 The primary L-band carrier used by GPS satellites to


transmit satellite data. Its frequency is 1575.42 MHz. It is
modulated by C/A code, P code, and a Navigation
Message.

26 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

L2 The secondary L-band carrier used by GPS satellites to


transmit satellite data. Its frequency is 1227.6 MHz. It is
modulated by P code and a Navigation Message.

label Information that you can assign to points in the project.


They appear beside points helping you locate them easily.
Labels are visible in Survey view and Plan view.
You can use the Trimble Geomatics Office softwares
predefined label definition to label points (for example,
with their names, feature codes, and elevations).
Labels use the same font and size as the ToolTips in your
Microsoft Windows Appearance settings.
To assign labels to points in the database, use View / Point
Labels.

layers A place to store data that has been grouped together.


Organizing data into layers in this way makes it easier to
manage. You can have any number of layers in a project.
To assign or reassign an entity to a layer, use the
Properties window. A layer name can have up to 100
alphanumeric characters.

least squares A mathematical method for the adjustment of


observations, based on the theory of probability. In this
adjustment method, the sum of the squares of all the
weighted residuals is minimized.

level observation A level observation is an observation in the field using a


digital level.

level of confidence A measure of the confidence in our results, expressed in a


percentage or sigma.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 263


Glossary

level of significance An expression of probability. A one-sigma (standard)


error is said to have a level of significance of 68 percent.
For one-dimensional errors, a 95 percent level of
significance is expressed by 1.96 sigma, and a 99 percent
level of significance is expressed by 2.576 sigma.

local ellipsoid The ellipsoid specified by a coordinate system. The


WGS-84 coordinates are first transformed onto this
ellipsoid, then converted to grid coordinates.

local geodetic The latitude, longitude, and height of a point. The


coordinates coordinates are expressed in terms of the local ellipsoid.

local geodetic At any point, a plane at the ellipsoid height of a given


horizon point which is parallel to the tangent plane to the ellipsoid
at that point. Coordinate values for the local geodetic
horizon are expressed as North, East, and Up. The LGH is
used for rotating EC Cartesian Coordinate differences,
before modeling a baseline on the ellipsoid. Azimuth
values computed from LGH components must be
corrected for skew normals as part of modeling on the
ellipsoid.

loop closure Loop closures provide an indication as to the amount of


error in a set of observations within a network.
A loop closure is calculated by selecting a point from
which one or more observations were taken, adding one of
those observations to the points coordinates, and
calculating coordinates of the second point based on that
observation. This process is repeated one or more times
around a loop, finally ending at the original starting point.
If there were no errors in the observations, the final
calculated coordinate would be exactly the same as the
original starting coordinate. By subtracting the calculated
coordinate from the original coordinate a misclosure is
determined. Dividing this error by the length of the line
allows the error to be expressed in parts per million.

26 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

This technique can also be used between two different


points when both points are known with a high degree of
accuracy. This is also known as a traverse closure.

major axis See ellipsoid.

mapping angle The angle between grid north on a mapping projection and
the meridian of longitude at a given point. Also know as
convergence.

mapping projection A rigorous mathematical expression of the curved surface


of the ellipsoid on a rectangular coordinate grid.

mean sea level The mean height of the surface of the ocean for all stages
of the tide. Used as a reference for elevations.

minimally A network adjustment in which only enough constraints to


constrained define the coordinate system are employed. Used to
measure internal consistency in observations.

minor axis See ellipsoid.

modeling Expressing an observation and its related errors


mathematically and geometrically on some defined
coordinate system, such as an ellipsoid.

multipath Interference (similar to ghosts on a television screen) that


occurs when GPS signals arrive at an antenna after
traveling different paths. The signal traveling the longer
path yields a larger pseudorange estimate and increases
the error. Multiple paths may arise from reflections from
structures near the antenna.

narrow-lane A linear combination of L1 and L2 carrier phase


observations (L1 + L2) that is useful for canceling out
ionospheric effects in collected baseline data. The
effective wavelength of the narrow-lane is 10.7 cm.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 265


Glossary

NAVDATA NAVDATA is the 1500-bit navigation message broadcast


by each satellite. This message contains system time,
clock correction parameters, ionospheric delay model
parameters, and details of the satellites ephemeris and
health. The information is used to process GPS signals to
obtain user position and velocity.

network A set of baselines. See also subnetwork.

network adjustment Solution of simultaneous equations designed to achieve


closure in a survey network by minimizing the sum of the
weighted squares of the residuals of the observations.
The adjustment technique employed by the Trimble
Geomatics Office software is sometimes called variation
of coordinates, and at other times the method of indirect
observations.

network status An indication that a particular observation will be


included in the adjustment.
Network means that it is included in the adjustment
Non-network means that it is excluded from the
adjustment.

NMEA National Marine Electronics Association


The NMEA 0183 Standard defines the interface for
marine electronic navigational devices. This standard
defines a number of strings referred to as NMEA strings
that contain navigational details such as positions.
Most Trimble GPS receivers can output positions as
NMEA strings.

normal In geodesy, the straight line perpendicular to the surface of


the ellipsoid.

26 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

normal distribution A graphical illustration of the theoretical distribution of


curve random variables around an expected value according to
probability theory. Used with histograms.

northing Northward reading of a grid value.

observation residual The correction applied to an observation, as determined


by the adjustment.

observations See surveying observations.

occupation time The amount of time required on a station, or point, to


achieve successful process of a GPS baseline. The amount
of time will vary depending on the surveying technique,
the type of GPS receiver used, and the precision required
for the final results. Occupation times can vary from a
couple of seconds (kinematic surveys) to several hours
(control or deformation surveys that require the highest
levels of precision and repeatability).

origin The intersection of axes in a coordinate system. The point


of beginning.

orthometric height The distance between a point and the surface of the geoid.
It is usually called the elevation.

OTF search method GPS baseline processing, whether real-time or


postprocessed, requires fixed integer solutions for the best
possible results. (See integer search.)
Historically, this search was done using measurements
collected while two or more receivers were stationary on
their respective points. Modern receivers and software can
use the measurements collected while the roving receiver
is moving. Because the receiver is moving, the data is
described as collected On-the-fly (OTF) and the integer
search using this data is an OTF search.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 267


Glossary

outlier An observation which is identified by statistical analysis


as having a residual too large for its estimated error. The
term derives from the graphical position of an observation
in a histogram.

over-determined A network for which more measurements have been made


than are necessary to compute the coordinates of the
network. Related to redundancy.

P-code The precise code transmitted by the GPS satellites. Each


satellite has a unique code that is modulated onto both the
L1 and L2 carrier waves. The P-code is replaced by a
Y-code when Anti-Spoofing is active.

parameter An independent variable in terms of which the coordinates


of points on a line or surface are given. See unknowns.

parity A form of error checking used in binary digital data


storage and transfer. Options for parity-checking include
Even, Odd, or None.

PDOP Position Dilution of Precision


A unitless figure of merit expressing the relationship
between the error in user position, and the error in satellite
position. Geometrically, PDOP is proportional to 1
divided by the volume of the pyramid formed by lines
running from the receiver to four satellites that are
observed. Values considered good for positioning are
small, for example 3. Values greater than 7 are considered
poor. Thus, small PDOP is associated with widely
separated satellites.
PDOP is related to horizontal and vertical DOP by:
2 2 2
PDOP = HDOP + VDOP

26 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

PDOP cutoff A receiver parameter specifying a maximum PDOP value


for positioning. When the geometric orientation of the
satellites yields a PDOP greater than the mask value, the
receiver stops computing position fixes.

PDOP mask The highest PDOP value at which a receiver will compute
positions.

phase center See antenna phase correction.

phase center models A model used to apply a correction to a GPS signal based
on a specific antenna type. The correction is based on the
elevation of the satellite above the horizon and models
electrical variations in the antenna phase center location.
These models are useful for eliminating errors introduced
when identical antennas are not used at both the base and
rover points. See also antenna phase correction.

plumbing The act of aligning the antenna or instrument along a


vertical line (plumb line) perpendicular to the
equipotential surface of earths gravity field.

point positions See autonomous positioning.

postprocess To process satellite data on a computer after it has been


collected.

PPM Parts per million


A standardized representation of a scale error in distance
measurements. A 1 PPM error would result in 1
millimeter of measurement error for every 1000 meters of
distance traveled.

precise ephemeris See ephemeris.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 269


Glossary

precision A measure of how closely random variables tend to


cluster around a computed value. High precision implies
small residuals. Usually expressed as one part in, or
alternatively, as parts per million.

PRN Pseudorandom number


A sequence of digital 1s and 0s that appear to be
randomly distributed like noise, but that can be exactly
reproduced. PRN codes have a low autocorrelation value
for all delays or lags except when they are exactly
coincident.
Each NAVSTAR satellite can be identified by its unique
C/A and P pseudorandom noise codes, so the term PRN is
sometimes used as another name for GPS satellite or SV.

probability A statistical percentage expressing what portion of a


hypothetical number of observations will fall within the
defined limits. Sometimes called level of significance.

probable value The adjusted value for observations and other quantities,
assuming that the adjustment has been done correctly. The
closest approximation to true value that is possible.

project The Trimble Geomatics Office software operates on data


in projects. You can consider a project to be the workspace
you are working in. New projects are always created from
existing templates and inherit all the elements of the
template. From this point on, all new work is saved only
in the new project.
A project contains all of the raw observations, computed
points, coordinate system definition, line work, text, and
CAD styles.

project datum The datum associated with a project in the Trimble


Geomatics Office software. All local coordinates are
displayed using the project datum.

27 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

projection Used to create flat maps that represent the surface of the
earth or parts of that surface.

propagated error Computed errors derived from estimated observational


errors and expressed in terms of coordinate positions.
Propagated coordinate errors may, in turn, be propagated
into relative errors in azimuth, distance, and delta height
between points.

Quality Acceptance One or more software evaluation tests performed on raw


test GPS measurement data to determine if the data passes or
fails a set of tolerance values that you define. These tests
either remove data from further processing or mark data
requiring quality improvements.

QC records Quality Control records


QC records contain information about the quality of the
measured GPS position. They are stored with the point
record.

ratio During initialization, the receiver determines the integer


number of wavelengths for each satellite. For a particular
set of integers, it works out the probability that it is the
correct set.
Ratio is the ratio of the probability of correctness of the
currently best set of integers to the probability of
correctness of the next-best set. Thus, a high ratio
indicates that the best set of integers is much better than
any other set. This gives us confidence that it is correct.
The ratio must be above 5 for new point and OTF
initializations.

RDOP Relative Dilution of Precision

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 271


Glossary

Real-Time kinematic A method of GPS surveying in real-time using short (Stop


and Go) occupation, while maintaining lock on at least 4
satellites. This method requires a wireless data link
between the base and rover receivers.

rectangular Coordinates in any system in which the axes of reference


coordinates intersect at right angles.

reduced column An abbreviated version of the normal equations in which


profile the equations are reordered to minimize the computer
memory required to store all nonzero elements.

redundancy The amount by which a control network is


overdetermined, or has more observations than are needed
to strictly compute its parts.

redundancy number A measure of the degrees of freedom in a portion, rather


than the entirety, of a control network.

redundant baselines A baseline observed to a point that has already been


connected to the network by other observations. A
redundant baseline can be either an independent
reobservation of a previous measurement, or an
observation to a point from another base. It is redundant
because it provides more information than is necessary to
uniquely determine a point. Redundant observations are
very useful, however, in that they provide a check on the
quality of previous measurements.

redundant A repeated observation, or an observation which


observation contributes to over-determining a network.

reference factor See standard error of unit weight.

reference frame The coordinate system of a datum.

reference station A base station.

27 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

reference variance The square of the reference factor.

relative errors Errors and precisions expressed for and between pairs of
network-adjusted control points.

residual The correction, or adjustment, of an observation to


achieve overall closure in a control network. Also, any
difference between an observed quantity and a computed
value for that quantity.

RINEX Receiver INdependent EXchange format


A standard GPS raw data file format used to exchange
files from multiple receiver manufacturers.

RMS Root Mean Square


RMS expresses the accuracy of point measurement. It is
the radius of the error circle within which approximately
70% of position fixes are found. It can be expressed in
distance units or in wavelength cycles.

rotated meridian A zone constant for the oblique Mercator mapping


projection.

rotation In transformations, an angle through which a coordinate


axis is moved around the coordinate system origin.

rover Any mobile GPS receiver and field computer that is


collecting data in the field. The position of a roving
receiver can be differentially-corrected relative to a
stationary base GPS receiver.

RTCM Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services


A Commission established to define a differential data
link for the real-time differential correction of roving GPS
receivers. There are two types of RTCM differential
correction messages, but all Trimble GPS receivers use
the newer Type 2 RTCM protocol.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 273


Glossary

RTK Real-time kinematic


A type of GPS survey.

satellite geometry Position and movement of GPS satellites during a GPS


survey.

scalar In least squares, a value applied to the variances (errors)


based on the required level of confidence.

scalar weighting A process of applying a scalar to the estimated errors to


achieve proper weighting of the observation. The three
types of scalars available in a network adjustment in the
Trimble Geomatics Office software are:
Default means that scalar is set to 1.00, initial estimated
error remains the same
Alternative means that scalar is set to the Reference Factor
of the previous adjustment
User-defined means that you can enter a value for the
scalar
The scalar is applied to the observation errors using one of
the following methods:
All Observations
Each Observation
Variance Component Groups

scale A multiplier used on coordinate and other linear variables,


such as for map projections and transformations.

SDMS Survey Data Management System


A set of format definitions for the storage of survey data.
AASHTO maintains this system.

27 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

Selective Availability Artificial degradation of the GPS satellite signal by the


(S/A) U.S. Department of Defense. Since 1st May 2000,
Selective Availability has been turned off.

semi-major axis One-half of the major axis.

semi-minor axis One-half of the minor axis.

session A period during which one or more GPS receivers log


satellite measure data.

set-up error Errors in tribrach centering or height of instrument at a


control point.

sideshot An observed baseline with no redundancy.

sigma A mathematical symbol or term for standard error.

single-frequency A type of receiver that only uses the L1 GPS signal. There
is no compensation for ionospheric effects.

site calibration A process of computing parameters which establishing the


relationship between WGS-84 positions (latitude,
longitude and ellipsoid height) determined by GPS
observations and local known coordinates defined by a
map projection and elevations above mean sea level. The
parameters are used to generate local grid coordinates
from WGS-84 (and vice-versa) real-time in the field when
using RTK surveying methods.

skyplot A polar plot that shows the paths of visible satellites for
the time interval selected for the graph. The elevation of
the satellite is represented in the radial dimension and the
azimuth is shown in the angular dimension. The result
depicts the satellites path as it appears to an observer
looking down from a place directly above the survey
point.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 275


Glossary

solution types A description of both the data and techniques used to


obtain baseline solutions from GPS measurements.
Typical solution types include descriptions such as code,
float, and fixed. These describe techniques used by the
baseline processor to obtain a baseline solution. Solution
types also may include descriptions such as L1, L2, wide-
lane, narrow-lane, or ionospheric free. These describe the
way the GPS measurements are combined to achieve
particular results. For more information, see the references
on GPS processing for a more in depth discussion of these
terms and techniques.

slope distance The distance in the plane parallel to the vertical difference
(slope) between the points.

SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio


A measure of the strength of a satellite signal. SNR ranges
from 0 (no signal) to around 35.

standard error A statistical estimate of error, according to which 68


percent of an infinite number of observations will
theoretically have absolute errors less than or equal to this
value.

standard error of A measure of the magnitude of observational residuals in


unit weight an adjusted network as compared to estimated
preadjustment observational errors.

State Plane Special definitions of Transverse Mercator and Lambert


Coordinates conformal mapping projections adopted by statute in the
USA. There is one set of such zones for NAD-27, and
another for NAD-83.

static (surveying) A method of GPS surveying using long occupations


(hours in some cases) to collect GPS raw data, then
postprocessing to achieve sub-centimeter precisions.

27 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

static network The static network describes the geometry and order in
which GPS baselines collected using static and fast static
techniques are organized and processed. The baseline
processor first examines the project for points with the
highest quality coordinates, and then builds the processing
network from those points. The result is a set of static
baselines that are derived using accurate initial
coordinates.

status Every observation and set of keyed-in coordinates for a


point has a status field (available in the Summary page of
the Properties window).
The status can be Enabled, Enabled as check, or Disabled:
Enabled observations and coordinates are always used by
recomputation in determining the calculated position for
the point.
Enabled as check observations and coordinates are only
used if there are no Enabled ones
Disabled observations and coordinates are never used.

stochastic model A general reference to the techniques used to estimate


errors in a network adjustment.

subnetwork A set of baselines connected together by common control


points, and independent of (separate from) any other
baselines. As used by the Trimble Geomatics Office
software, a network may consist of one or more
subnetworks, and any one subnetwork may consist of as
few as one baseline and two control points.

Super-trak A Trimble proprietary method of processing the L2 signal


when the P-code is encrypted.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 277


Glossary

surveying Measurements made at or between control points using


observations surveying equipment, including GPS receivers and
conventional equipment.

SV Satellite Vehicle (or Space Vehicle)

symbols and line Symbols and line types are maintained using the Trimble
types Symbol and Line Type Editor utilities. Use these editors to
create new symbols and line types as well as to edit
existing ones. Symbols are stored in symbol libraries and
line types are stored in line type libraries.
The Trimble Geomatics Office software uses the current
system symbol and line type libraries. When saving an
edited library you can make this the system library (if it is
not already the current system library).

systematic errors An error that occurs with the same sign, and often the
same magnitude, in a number of related observations.

tau (value) A value computed from an internal frequency distribution


based upon the number of observations, degrees of
freedom, and a given probability percentage (95%). This
value is used to determine if an observation is not fitting
with the others in the adjustment. If an observations
residual exceeds the tau, it is flagged as an outlier. Known
as tau lines in the histogram of standardized residuals,
vertical lines left and right of the center vertical line.

tau criterion Allen Popes statistical technique for detecting


observation outliers. For more information, see Pope
(1976).

TDOP Time Dilution of Precision

terrestrial A terrestrial observation is an observation in the field


observation using a laser rangefinder or conventional instrument.

27 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

TOW Time of Week


TOW in seconds, from midnight Saturday night/Sunday
morning GPS time.

tracking The process of receiving and recognizing signals from a


satellite.

transformation The rotation, shift, and scaling of a network to move it


from one coordinate system to another.

transformation A selected group of observations used to compute


group transformation parameters unique to that group of
observations. Typically, the observations within the group
are the same type with similar errors and measured using a
common method.

transformation A set of parameters derived for a network adjustment or


parameters user-defined, that transform one datum to another.
Typically with GPS the parameters are generated to
transform WGS-84 to the local datum.

tribrach Centering device used for mounting GPS antennas and


other survey instruments on survey tripods.

tribrach centering The errors associated with centering (plumbing) the


errors tribrach over the observed point. These errors are
estimated. The estimate is based on surveying the quality
of surveying methods and should be conservative.

tropo correction Tropospheric correction


The correction applied to a satellite measurement to
correct for tropospheric delay.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 279


Glossary

tropo model tropospheric model


GPS signals are delayed by the troposphere. The amount
of the delay will vary with the temperature, humidity,
pressure, height of the station above sea level, and the
elevation of the GPS satellites above the horizon.
Corrections to the code and phase measurements can be
made using a tropo model to account for these delays.

univariate A mathematical function describing the behavior of


one-dimensional random errors, in:
angle
distance
difference in height
elevation
ellipsoid height

URA User Range Accuracy


A measure of the errors that may be introduced by satellite
problems and Selective Availability (S/A) if a particular
satellite vehicle (SV) is used. A URA of 32 meters
indicates that S/A is enabled. The URA value is set by the
Control Segment and is broadcast by the satellites.

unknowns The computed adjustments to coordinates and


transformation parameters. Also used to compute
observation residuals.

US National United States government agency that maintains the


national geodetic datum and all geodetic survey control
networks within the US and its territories.

US Survey Foot 1200/3937 meter. The official unit of linear measure for
NAD-27.

28 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Glossary

UTC Universal Time Coordinated


A time standard based on local solar mean time at the
Greenwich meridian. See also GPS time.

variance The square of the standard error.

variance component A least-squares technique for estimating the relative error


estimation of different portions of a network.

variance group One of the groups of observations for which variance


component estimation is being used in a network
adjustment.

variance-covariance The set of numbers expressing the variances and


matrix covariances in a group of observations.

VDOP Vertical Dilution of Precision

vector A three-dimensional line between two points.

vertical Similar to the normal, except that it is computed from the


tangent plane to the geoid instead of the ellipsoid.

vertical adjustment A network adjustment of vertical observations and


coordinates only.

vertical control point A point with vertical coordinate accuracy only. The
horizontal position is of a lower order of accuracy or is
unknown.

WAVE Weighted Ambiguity Vector Estimator


WAVE is the Trimble baseline processor. It computes GPS
vectors from field observations made using static,
FastStatic, or kinematic data collection procedures.

weight The inverse of the variance of an observation.

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 281


Glossary

weighting strategy The collection of values used to augment


variance-covariance matrices in the Trimble Geomatics
Office software.

weights The set of weights, or the inverse of the variance-


covariance matrix of correlated observations.

WGS-84 World Geodetic System (1984)


The mathematical ellipsoid used by GPS since January
1987.

wide-lane A linear combination of L1 and L2 carrier phase


observations (L1 - L2). This is useful for its low effective
wavelength (86.2 cm) and for finding integer ambiguities
on long baselines.

X, Y and Z In the Earth Centered Cartesian system, X refers to the


direction of the coordinate axis running from the system
origin to the Greenwich Meridian; Y to the axis running
from the origin through the 90 east longitude meridian,
and Z to the polar ice cap. In rectangular coordinate
systems, X refers to the east-west axis, Y to the
north-south axis, and Z to the height axis.

Y-code Y-code is an encrypted form of the information contained


in the P-code. Satellites transmit Y-code in place of P-
code when Anti-Spoofing is in effect.

zenith delay The delay, caused by the troposphere, of a GPS signal


observed from a satellite directly overhead. As a satellite
approaches the horizon, the signal path through the
troposphere becomes longer and the delay increases.

28 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index
Symbols datum transformations 411, 414
descriptions for points 341
#, wildcard 165 ellipsoids 411, 413
*, wildcard 165 entities 338
.html 384 entities, selecting layers 322
?, wildcard 165 entities, using feature code
processing 319
feature codes to points 340
Numerics field codes 476
3D control points geoid models 411
color of 150 lines 345
lines, using feature code
processing 319
linework between points 345
A
linework for observations 347
A1 Viewer utility. See Trimble A1 Viewer points 338
utility 465 points with attributes 382
add 348 points, by azimuth and distance 341
adding points, manually by coordinates 338
annotations 354 points, using feature code
annotations, using feature code processing 319
processing 319 site definitions 411
arcs 348 symbols, to .sym file 437
attributes to feature codes 390 text to projects 352
attributes to points 388 adjusted quality
attributes to projects 381 recomputation 179, 490
azimuths, manually 344 adjustment
CAD properties to a point 340 horizontal 51
coordinate systems 411, 417 adjustments
coordinate systems to .csd file 417 horizontal, computing 227
curves 350 inclined plane 228

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 283


Index

using a calibration in a site version of Trimble Survey Controller


vertical 51 software to transfer to 78
vertical, computing 228 antenna heights
vertical, including 228 editing 211
vertical, maximum inclination 233 selecting points by 157
annotation templates 322, 331, 426 antenna models, NGS 468
adding layers 326 applying, GPS site calibrations 239
creating 332, 336, 426, 431 arcs
deleting 335 Also see entities
editing 335 adding 348
field codes in 331 viewing properties of 350
for lines and arcs 434 ArcView (*.dbf/*.shp/*.shw) Shapefiles 397
for points, example 431 ArcView, export format 368
from feature code processing 431 ASCII data files
predefined 331, 431 custom formats, importing 68
specifying layers for 432 importing 64
viewing, how to 332, 431 ASCII formats
annotations exporting data to 367
Also see entities ASCII formats, custom
adding 354 exporting data 367
adding using feature code attributes 378
processing 319 .ddf files for projects 31
amount of text 334 .fcl files for projects 31
and labels 143 adding to points 388
default position 334 adding to projects 381
defining 331 collecting 383
field codes 470 collecting, .ddf files 98, 383, 385
floating 334 collecting, .fcl files 96
moving 334 creating 426
orientation of 333 creating custom reports 391
position of 331, 433 cutting, or copying, and pasting points
specifying layers 334 with 389
viewing 222 date recorded 398
viewing properties of 355 defining 378
antenna details defining sets to collect 438
editing 212 deleting 389
Antenna files for feature codes 425
transferring to the Trimble Survey horizontal precision 398
Controller software 101 importing with .dc files 381
managing 189, 386

28 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

point elevation 398 baselines, GPS


setting up projects for 381, 388, 425, disabled, color of 149
427, 443 postprocessed, color of 149
setting up projects for, how to 31 potential, color of 149
setting up projects, .ddf files 381, 385 blocks, for symbols 371
time recorded 398
types of 439
using new feature codes in a C
project 389
viewing 386 C&G standard, export format 368
AutoCAD files 366 CAD details
exporting 366 adding to a point 340
AutoCAD With Attributes (*.dxf) files 397 of a point, viewing 188
AutoCAD with attributes, export format 368 CAD formats
AutoCAD, export format 368 exporting data to 367
Autodesk fieldbook, export format 369 CAD styles 322, 327
automatic feature code processing 30 assigning to entities 327
autonomous, method of measuring creating 327, 331
coordinates 116 defining 327
azimuth deleting 327
adding points by 341 deleting, how to 330
azimuth observations 199 editing 327, 330
survey details of 199 viewing 331
viewing details 175 calculated positions
azimuth system, south 57 for GPS baselines or points 33
azimuths of points, recomputation 505
adding, manually 344 calibration point pairs 229
one-dimensional 231
selecting 229
three-dimensional 228, 231
B
two-dimensional 231
background maps 150 Calibration Report
backsight class, points 115 Also see system-generated reports
Base Occupation page, for GPS Calibration Report, sections of 235
observations 193 Calibration.html. See Calibration Report
baseline processing calibrations. See GPS site calibrations
selection method for 151 changing
Baseline Processing module. See WAVE .fcl files 382
Baseline Processing module 17 coordinate systems 28, 40, 45
coordinate systems, automatically 53

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 285


Index

geoid models 44 computing


geoid models for sites 52 datum transformations 226
maximum error and iteration datum transformations, how to 226
count 233 GPS site calibration parameters 232
project properties 27 horizontal adjustment 227
status of observations 206 vertical adjustment 228
view filters 145 context
check class, points 115 field codes 471
Checkin folder 37, 445 control class
checking points 115
data 140 control codes 426
tolerance 33 assigning to points 442
tolerances 33 creating 427, 442
classes, points defining 442
Trimble Survey Controller control points
software 114 3D, color of 150
CMM files, export format 368 horizontal, color of 150
codes, field. See field codes importing 64
collecting vertical, color of 150
attributes, .ddf files 98 control quality
feature codes in the field 314 recomputation 179, 490
color settings control quality, fixed
for a project 148 recomputation 179
colors conventional observations
of flags 14 recomputation 496
of stations 149 viewing details 175, 191, 194
of symbols 329, 429 Convert to RINEX utility. See Trimble
Combined Datum Grid (*.cdg) files 89 Convert to RINEX utility 455
creating 89 Coordinate page, for points 178
transferring 89 coordinate system database 40, 41, 45, 411,
version of Trimble Survey Controller 419
software to transfer to accessing 410
commas selecting coordinate systems 45
between point names 155 viewing 41
components (NE,e,h) coordinate system definitions
quality of, recomputation 489 using datum grids in the field 89
computation summary, GPS site using geoid models in the field 83
calibrations 233 coordinate system field codes 473
coordinate system groups 417

28 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

coordinate systems (and zones) 39 status (enabled/disabled),


.csd file, using 419 recomputation 489
adding 411, 417 coordinates, keyed-in 485
changing 28, 40, 45 more than one set for a point,
changing automatically 53 recomputation 489
creating 410, 411 quality, recomputation 488
default for projects 28 recomputation 484, 509
defined 54 coordinates, multiple
defining 411, 417 and observations, recomputation 502
duplicating 417 copied, method of measuring
editing 411, 417 coordinates 116
from .dc files 40 copying
imported .dc file different to Also see cutting, or copying, and
project 112 pasting
predefined 410 projects 35
recently-used, selecting 50 correction planes, for control point pairs 228
saving as sites 58 corrections
Scale factor-only 54 sea level 54
selecting 28, 40, 43, 45, 47, 411 creating
selecting from the .csd file 45 .cdg files 89
selecting geoid models for 44 .ddf files 98
selecting sites 51 .fcl files 316
using datum grids 89 annotation styles 336
viewing 28 annotation templates 332, 426, 431
viewing details 44, 48 attributes 426
coordinate systems, published 226 CAD styles 327, 331
coordinate systems, viewing details 239 control codes 427, 442
coordinates coordinate systems 410, 411
adding points manually by 338 custom report formats 391
and observations used for points 178 custom reports 391
entering for project location 60 datum transformations 411
entering into the Trimble Geomatics export formats 477
Office software 182 feature and attribute libraries,
entering, using Properties example 426
window 182 feature codes 427
meaning and multiple observations, feature codes with attributes 434
recomputation 504 GPS site calibration 51, 58
methods used to measure 116 layers 324, 326
qualities 116 line styles 423, 431
seeding, recomputation 495 point styles 423, 426, 427

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 287


Index

point styles, example 327 organizing. See layers


projects 24, 36 tools for analysis 214
selection sets, on import 125 data collector, exporting survey data to 367
symbols 420, 421, 423 Data Dictionary (*.ddf) files 385
symbols, example 421 collecting attributes 383, 385
templates 36, 37 creating 98
creating reports 358 exporting to Trimble Survey
Current.csd. See coordinate system database Controller software 385
curves for projects with attributes 31
Also see entities line features 385
adding 350 setting up projects for attributes 381,
viewing properties of 351 385, 444
custom format definitions transferring 98
items in dialogs 475 version of Trimble Survey Controller
custom formats 470 software to transfer to 78
ASCII data files, importing 68 Data Dictionary Editor software 378, 381,
body 474 385
footer 474 creating .ddf files 98
header 474 data files
overview 474 importing 338
custom reports 359 Data Transfer utility. See Trimble Data
creating 391 Transfer utility
creating for points with attributes 391 data, postprocessed kinematic 126
creating formats 391 Also see GPS Data (*.dat) files
running 391 data, static 126
selecting points to report 391, 395 data, survey
cutting, or copying, and pasting exporting to a file or data
entities 355 collector 367
points with attributes 389 database
coordinate system 40, 41, 45
tables 382
D date, attributes 439
Datum Grid (*.cdg) files
dashes Also see Combined Datum Grid
between point names 155 (*.cdg) files
data Datum Grid (*.dgf) files
adding to database, creating 467
recomputation 484 datum grids
checking 140 importing .dc files, wrong for .cdg
displaying in zoom navigator 13 file 113
editing, recomputation 484

28 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

using in a coordinate system 89 deleting


using in the field in coordinate system annotation templates 335
definition 89 attributes 389
Datum Transformation Parameters section, CAD styles 327
Calibration Report 236 CAD styles, how to 330
datum transformations layers 326
adding 411, 414 projects 34
computing 226 projects, retrieving 35
computing, how to 226 delta elevation 343
creating 411 descriptions, for points
editing 411 adding 341
predefined 226 Design Points As Staked report 361
DC File Editor utility. See devices 401
<DefaultParaFont>Trimble DC File deleting 409
Editor utility managing 409
default setting up for Trimble Data
.fcl files 423, 424, 427, 436 Transfer 402
coordinate system selected for transferring data to 401
projects 28 types for the Data Transfer utility 402
elevations 53 viewing properties of 409
geoid models 49 dialogs, appearing when importing 69
layer 322 digital level files, importing 131
projections. See default Transverse digital levels, supported by the software 131
Mercator projection Digital Terrain Model (*.dtx) files
default elevation transferring 99
recomputation 513 distance
default Transverse Mercator projection 40, adding points by 341
45, 55 units to use 342
creating projects 54 distance recomputations 33
defining 56 drag-and-drop
importing .dat files, undefined 125 importing .dat files from computer to
importing .dc files, undefined 113 project 122
selecting geoid models 44 importing .dc files from computer to
undefined 53 project 109
defining importing files to a project 64
annotations 331 drawing
attributes 378 palette 421
coordinate systems 411, 417 size 421
line styles 420 symbols 421
deleted class, points 115 tools 421

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 289


Index

DTM points editing antenna heights 211


version of Trimble Survey Controller elevation
software to transfer to 78 delta 343
duplicate points. See points, duplicate elevations 224
duplicating determining for GPS points 42
records 411, 412 null 50
Dynamically Linked Library (*.dll) files 68 specifying default for projects 53
elevations, default. See default elevation
Ellipse Controls toolbar 18
E ellipses
between point names 155
easting and northing ellipsoid heights 42, 43
used in calibration computation 231 ellipsoid records
editing editing 411
.dc files 444 ellipsoid, WGS-84 86
.fcl files 425 ellipsoids
annotation templates 335 adding 411, 413
antenna heights 212 creating 412
CAD styles 327, 330 editing 411
CAD-related properties of entering
entities 213 project location coordinates 60
coordinate systems 411, 417 entities
data, recomputation 484 adding 338
datum transformations 411 adding using feature code
ellipsoid records 411 processing 319
ellipsoids 411 adding, selecting layers 322
geoid models 411 assigning CAD styles 327
layers 325 changing styles of 19
Locked property of layers 14 cutting, or copying, and pasting 355
multiple entities 209 deselecting 152
multiple entities, selection method editing CAD-related properties 213
for 151 editing multiple, selection method
point details 176 for 151
point details, survey 177 editing survey-related properties 211
site definitions 411 hiding, in layers 325
survey data 206 multiple, editing 209
survey-related properties of an viewing 173
entity 211 entities, how displayed 322
symbols and line types 420 entities, linework
view filters 14 viewing 219
Visible property of layers 14

29 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

entities, selected NGS Bluebook files 372


exporting 367 points and attributes to GIS
entities, selecting 140 formats 367
entities, selecting all 152 project database 367
entities, selecting, in layers 324 selected entities 367
entities, selecting, in specified layers 164 survey data to a file or data
entities, selecting, in the Plan view 163 collector 367
entities, selecting, methods 151 to data in a custom ASCII format 367
entities, selecting, using queries 166 to third party software formats 365
entities, selecting, with the mouse 152
Error Estimate page, for points 178, 187
error flags 15 F
error messages
importing .dat files 125 false northings and eastings 57
importing .dc files 112, 113 updated 54
errors FastStatic baselines
in data, viewing 202 direction of 207
reported in system-generated FastStatic baselines, viewing details 191
reports 32 FCpro.htm. See feature code-processing
Errors and Warning section, Recompute report
Report 515 Feature and Attribute Editor utility. See
errors, estimated 178 Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor
event marker, color of 150 utility
events data feature and attribute libraries 378
viewing details 175 changing 382
exiting, the Trimble Geomatics Office creating 316
software 22 creating, example 426
exploding default 423, 424, 427, 436
merged points 127 defining CAD styles 327
Export folder 445 exporting to survey controller 383
export formats 366 for collecting feature codes and
Also see custom formats attributes 96
creating 477 for processing feature codes 314, 315,
GIS 397 316
exporting for projects with attributes 31
.ddf files to Trimble Survey Controller from TRIMMAP 315
software 385 importing .dc files, different to
.fcl files to survey controller 383 project 113
AutoCAD files 366 in the field 382
data to ASCII and CAD formats 367 processing 423

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 291


Index

processing feature codes 427 layers for 437


projects, setting up for attributes 425 procedures for points 425
saving 427, 443 processing 316
selecting 381, 382 processing automatically 30
transferring to Trimble Survey processing. See feature code
Controller software 96, 314, 315, processing
383, 443 feature codes with attributes
using in Trimble Geomatics Office using new in a project 389
software 443 features 385
Feature and Attribute Library (*.fcl) files lines, in .ddf files 385
Also see feature and attribute libraries points 385
version of Trimble Survey Controller setting up projects for 30
software to transfer to 78 field codes
feature code processing 316, 425, 443, 444 accessing 470
.fcl files 314, 315, 427 adding 476
adding annotation templates 431 context 471
assigning styles to points and coordinate system 473
lines 425 elements of syntax 470
automatically 30 in annotation templates 331
by selection 319 modifiers 472
feature and attribute libraries 316 name 471
layers, selecting 322 options 472
selection method for 151 overview 470
selection set 316, 317 project 473
undoing 318 field codes, system 473
feature code-processing report field fill-in, how to use 339
(FCpro.html) 319 files
choosing the way you are AutoCAD 366
notified 319 AutoCAD, exporting 366
locating and opening 320 Background Map 150
feature codes 385, 425, 426, 427 digital level, importing 131
adding layers 326 Dynamically Linked Library (*.dll).
adding to points 340 See Dynamically Linked Library
attributes 425 (*.ddl) files
collecting in the field 314 exporting survey data to 367
collecting, .fcl files 96 Geoid Grid (*.ggf). See Geoid Grid
creating 427, 434 (*.ggf) files
descriptions of 434 importing to a project more than
entering in the Properties once 70
window 314, 315 importing to a project, example 75

29 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

Latitude Grid (*.cdg). See Latitude floating annotations 334


Grid (*.dgf) files folder structure 7
Linetype.ltp 327 folders
Longitude Grid (*.dgf). See Longitude Checkin 37, 445
Grid (*.dgf) files Export 445
Meterological 129 for projects 445
National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Reports 32, 317, 320
Sheet. See National Geodetic format
Survey (NGS) Data Sheet files of .dc file to be created 80
Navigation Message 129 formats
NGS Bluebook 372 export 366
Observation Data 129 RINEX file 129
RINEX. See RINEX files selecting 29
RINEX. See Trimble Convert to formats, custom
RINEX utility 455 Also see custom formats
Survey Controller (*.dc). See Survey body 474
Controller (*.dc) files footer 474
Symbols.dxf 371 header 474
Symbols.sym 327, 371 FTP site xvii, xxi
transferring to the Trimble Survey
Controller software 78, 79
transferring to the Trimble Survey G
Controller software, how to 79
TRIMMAP graphics 366 geographic information system (GIS)
World 150 export formats 397
files, ASCII data formats, exporting points and
custom formats, importing 68 attributes to 367
importing 64 Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files 42, 83
files, project creating 467
stored in specified folder 25 importing .dc files, wrong geoid
files, rotation of 150 model for 113
filters, view 143 size of file to be created 85
Flag icon, in status bar 14 transferring to Trimble Survey
flagged observations Controller software 83, 88
color of 149 version of Trimble Survey Controller
flags software to transfer to 78
colors of 14 geoid indicator, Properties window 180
error 15 Geoid Model Definition section, Calibration
suppressing 14 Report 237
flags, warning 202 geoid models 40, 42

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 293


Index

adding 411 from a GPS receiver 119


area defined by 85 messages and dialogs 125
changing 44 points with duplicate names 127
changing for sites 52 GPS loop closures 205
choosing default for a coordinate GPS observations
system 419 determining positions for,
converting between heights and recomputation 494
elevations 43 disabling 192
default 49 pages in Properties window for
determining elevation for GPS using for a recomputation 206
points 42 using in a network adjustment 192
editing 411 viewing details 175, 191, 192
for a default Transverse Mercator GPS occupations 178
projection 44 viewing details 193
for coordinate systems 44 GPS points 229
importing .dc files, wrong .ggf determining elevation using a geoid
file 113 model 42
selecting 43 GPS positions
subgridding 83 collecting 426
using as part of the coordinate system GPS receiver device
definition in the field 83 Also see devices
viewing properties 49, 58 setting up 405
geoid models, quality 34 GPS receiver. See Trimble GPS receiver
geoid separations 86 GPS site calibration, recomputation 512
viewing 42 GPS site calibrations 42, 43, 58, 224, 232
geoid-ellipsoid separations. See geoid analyzing parameters 232
separations applying 239
geomatics, definition 2 computation summary 233
GPS Baseline Processing Report 17 computation summary
GPS baselines parameters 233
calculated positions for 33 computing parameters 232
direction of, recomputation 495 creating 51, 58
multiple 33 example 240
selecting by baseline precision 160 finding problem point pairs 234
GPS Data (*.dat) files performing 58
importing from the Trimble Survey point pairs, errors 234
Controller software 118 report 235
importing from your computer 122 selecting calibration components 224
GPS Data (*.dat) files, importing 118 using in future projects 239
drag-and-drop 122 using saved 239

29 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

GPS site calibrations, parameters horizontal control points


analyzing 233 color of 150
GPS Solution (APC) page, for points 178 horizontal residual, maximum 233
GPS vectors. See GPS baselines HTML viewer 358
GPS WAAS, method of measuring hyphens
coordinates 116 in point names 155
graphics window 1014
color of 149
Grid Factory utility. See Trimble Grid I
Factory utility 467
grid lines icons, in the status bar 14
viewing 147 import formats See custom formats
grid points 229 import reports 73, 136
ground scale factor, setting 61 Messages section 137
parts of 136
Project Details section 137
Recompute Report 137
H
Import.html. See imported files report
heights, ellipsoid 42, 43 imported files reports 73, 136
heights, WGS-84 224 importing
Help 6 .dc files 52
printing topics 6 .dc files containing attributes 384
utilities 400 ASCII data files 64
Help, context-sensitive xvi, xx attributes, with .dc files 381
Hidden Layers icon, in the status bar 14 control points 64
High reference variance (GPS Post data files 338
Processing), warning message 205 data files, selection sets 169
High RMS (GPS Post Processing), warning digital level files 131
message 205 files to a project 66
HighRMS (RTK), warning message 204 files to a project, drag-and-drop 64
horizontal adjustment files to a project, more than once 70
computing 227 files to a project, Pacsoft example 75
including 228 messages and dialogs that may
scale factor 233 appear 69
Horizontal Adjustment Parameters section, National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data
Calibration Report 237 Sheet files
horizontal adjustments, GPS site quality of points 67
calibration 51 selection sets created 70
horizontal components, quality for importing, .dat files 118
recomputation 509 drag-and-drop 122

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 295


Index

error messages 125 kinematic baselines, postprocessed


from a GPS receiver 119 viewing details 191
from the Trimble Survey Controller
software 118
from your computer 122 L
messages and dialogs 125
points with duplicate names 127 L1 Code, method of measuring
undefined default Transverse coordinates 116
Mercator projection 125 labels
importing, .dc files and annotations 143
different coordinate systems 112 field codes 470
different feature and attribute for points 142
libraries 113 laser rangefinder observations
error messages 112, 113 color of 149
from computer to project 110 details of 197
from computer to project, drag-and- disabling 198
drop 109 recomputations 496
from the Trimble Survey Controller status of 198
software 106 values 198
into the Trimble Geomatics Office viewing details of 175, 191
software 106 Latitude Grid (*.dgf) files 89
messages and dialogs that appear 112 Layer Selection tool 322
undefined default Transverse layer, default 322
Mercator projection 113 layers 322
wrong .cdg file for datum grid 113 adding in annotation templates 326
wrong geoid model for .ggf file 113 adding in feature codes 326
installing creating 324, 326
Trimble Grid Factory utility, how deleting 326
to 467 editing 325
inverse, between two points editing Locked property of 14
displaying 214 editing visible property of 14
Inverse.html report 216 hiding entities 325
iteration count, changing 233 locking 325
managing 323
selecting 322
selecting all entities in 164
K
selecting entities in 324
keyed-in control, method of measuring specifying for annotation
coordinates 116 templates 432
keyed-in normal, method of measuring specifying for annotations 334
coordinates 116 layers, for feature codes 437

29 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

least squares method 227, 228 M


level observations
viewing details 175, 191 MapInfo (*.mif/*.mid) files 397
Level report 362 MapInfo, export format 368
line features mapping quality
in .ddf files 385 recomputation 179, 490
line styles 426, 427 marker, event, color of 150
Also see CAD styles maximum error, changing 233
assigning to lines, arcs, curves 425 mean sea level 42
creating 423, 431 meaning
defining 420 position of sideshot points, rules 504
line types 420, 423 menu, attributes 439
editing 420 menus
line types, predefined 427 shortcut 21
lines merging
Also see entities duplicate points, warning flags 72
Also see linework messages
adding 345 received on import 69
adding using feature code warning 53, 204, 384
processing 319 Messages section, import reports 137
how displayed 442 Meterological file 129
viewing properties of 347 Microstation (*.dgn) files 397
Linetype.ltp files 327 Microstation, export format 368
Linetype.ltp See feature and attribute misclosure
libraries, default warning message, viewing 178
linework misclosures 14, 15
Also see arcs mouse pointers. See pointers, shapes 22
Also see curves moving
Also see lines points, recomputation 512
adding between points 345 multiple
adding for observations 347 GPS baselines 33
viewing properties of 346 observations 33
Locked Layers icon, in the status bar 14 Multiple failures (GPS Post Processing),
Longitude Grid (*.dgf) files 89 warning message 205
Loop Closure Report multiple sideshot observations,
loop closures, GPS. See GPS loop closures recomputations 33
Low ratio (GPS Post Processing), warning
message 205

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 297


Index

N Also see laser rangefinder


observations
name Also see reduced observations
field codes 471 adding linework for 347
National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Sheet and coordinates used for points 178
files, importing 130 changing status 206
Navigation Message file 129 disabling 195, 197
Network Adjustment module 18 enabled as a check, color of 149
opening a project created with 26 misclosures 14, 15
Network Adjustment Report 18 multiple 33
network adjustment styles 18 multiple sideshot, recomputations 33
network-adjusted points quality 117
color of 150 recomputation 484, 509
New Project shortcut, in the project bar 24 selecting 158
New Project tool 24 selecting from or to a specified
NGS antenna models 468 point 159
NGS Bluebook Export, format 368 viewing details 175
NGS Bluebook files 372 viewing details of 191
normal class, points 115 observations, azimuth. See azimuth
northing and easting observations
used in calibration computation 231 observations, multiple
note records and coordinates, recomputation 502
viewing 218 and meaning coordinates,
null elevations 50 recomputation 504
numeric, attributes 439 to sideshot points, recomputation 503
observations, raw GPS
processing 17
O Occupations and Setups pages, for
Observation Data file 129 points 178
Observation page occupations, GPS 178
for conventional observations 195, viewing details 193
197, 200 online Help xvi, xx
for GPS observations 193 Open Project shortcut, in the project bar 26
for laser rangefinder observations 198 Open Project tool 26
for reduced observations 201 opening
Observation Statistics page projects, how to 26
for GPS observations 193, 195 Properties window 173
observations Summary page in Properties
Also see conventional observations window 180
Also see GPS observations system-generated reports 320

29 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

templates 38 Point Derivation Report, example 181


utilities 400 Point Derivations section, Recompute
options Report 516
field codes 472 point features 385
origin point pairs, calibration 229
updating default Transverse Mercator errors 234
projection 227 finding problem pairs 234
Out-of-Tolerance Closure (recomputation), problem with 233
warning message 204 selecting 229, 230
Out-of-Tolerance Observation three-dimensional 228, 231
(recomputation), warning message 204 Point Residuals, Calibration Report 238
point styles 426, 427
Also see CAD styles
P assigning to points 420, 425
creating 423, 426, 427
Pacsoft export format 369 creating, example 327
Pacsoft files defining settings for 428
importing to a project, example 75 selecting 437
pages, Properties window. See Properties point styles, size 429
window point symbols 327, 420
Pan mode, pointer 22 pointers, shapes 22
Pan tool 141 points
parameters, calibration Also see entities
analyzing 232, 233 Also see recomputation
computation summary 233 #, wildcard 165
computing 232 *, wildcard 165
for vertical adjustment 228 ?, wildcard 165
parameters, vertical shift 228 adding 338
pasting. See cutting, or copying, and pasting adding by azimuth and distance 341
PC cards, Trimble Survey Controller 401 adding descriptions for 341
Plan view 10, 19 adding feature codes to 340
selecting entities 163 adding using feature code
using 321 processing 319
plane adjustment, inclined 228 adding, manually by coordinates 338
plane transformations 227 alphanumeric names 155
planes, correction for control point pairs 228 arcs between, adding 348
plot scale, specified 329 assigning qualities to 126
Point Derivation Report backsight class 115
generating 180 CAD properties, adding to 340
viewing 180 calculated positions for 33

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 299


Index

calculating position 505 selecting by antenna height 157


check class 115 selecting by GPS quality 156
classes, Trimble Survey Controller selecting by name 154
software 114 selecting by name, rules for 155
color of 149 selecting by name, wildcards 165
commas between names 155 stake class 115
control class 115 stakeout information 187
control codes for 442 stakeout information, viewing 186
coordinates, methods used to viewing CAD details 188
measure 116 viewing details of 175
dashes between names 155 viewing details, selection method
deleted class 115 for 151
details of, Properties window 176 viewing observations and coordinates
details, survey 177 used for 178
determining quality of, viewing qualities 178
recomputation 510 Points Report 359
displaying inverse between two 214 points with attributes
ellipses between names 155 adding to projects 382
entering coordinates for using creating custom reports for 391
Properties window 182 cutting, or copying, and pasting 389
entering coordinates into the Trimble points, calculating position, determining
Geomatics Office software 182 criteria for 489
entering traverses 343 points, calibration
exploding merged 127 selecting 163
exporting to GIS formats 367 points, duplicate
how displayed 442 managing 117
hyphens in names 155 merging 73
labels for 142 merging, warning flags 72
lines between, adding 345 renaming 72, 189
linework between, adding 345 selecting 161
managing attributes for 189 selection method for 151
more than one set of keyed-in points, GPS 229
coordinates, recomputation 489 determining elevation using a geoid
moving, recomputation 512 model 42
normal class 115 points, grid 229
pages in Properties window for 178 points, network adjusted
procedures for feature codes 425 color of 150
quality of coordinates 116 points, sideshot
quality, selecting for import 67 multiple observations to,
selecting 153 recomputation 503

30 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

rules for meaning position of, Project Details section, Calibration


recomputation 504 Report 236
points, staked Project Details section, import reports 137
selecting 162 Project Details section, Recompute
points, starting. See starting points Report 515
points, traverse project field codes 473
recomputations 508 project files
points, WGS-84 in specified folder 25
relationship with grid points 224 projection parameters
positions calculated 57
calculated for GPS baselines or projections
points 33 default. See default Transverse
GPS, collecting 426 Mercator projection
Postprocessed Kinematic (PPK) vectors projects 24
color of 149 adding attributes 381
postprocessed kinematic data adding points with attributes 382
Also see GPS Data (*.dat) files changing .fcl files 424
importing 126 changing coordinate systems 28
PPK Continuous vectors changing properties 27
color of 149 color settings 148
processing coordinate systems for 39
raw GPS observations 17 copying 35
processing feature codes. See feature code creating 24, 36
processing default coordinate system for 28
project default elevation, recomputation 513
properties of 27 defining CAD styles 327
project bar 12 deleting 34
Also see zoom navigator 12 entering location coordinates 60
groups 12 geoid models for 40
New Project shortcut 24 importing files to 66
Open Project shortcut 26 importing files to, using drag-and-
opening a project 26 drop 64
parts of 12 opening, how to 26
shortcuts 12 retrieving deleted 35
showing or hiding 13 selecting a template for 36
utilities, opening 400 selecting coordinate systems 43
project bar, creating a project 24 selecting unit values and format 29
project databases setting up 23
exporting 367 setting up for attributes 381, 388,
425, 427, 443

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 301


Index

setting up for attributes, .ddf Q


files 381, 385
setting up for attributes, how to 31 qualities
setting up for features 30 assigning to points 126
templates 40 for points, viewing 178
using new feature codes with observations 117
attributes in a project 389 quality
viewing, coordinate systems 28 geoid models 34
projects, background colour of 429 hierarchy table, recomputation 492
projects, folders 445 hierarchy, recomputation 490
projects, templates 36 keyed-in coordinate,
properties recomputation 488
coordinate system, viewing 48 keyed-in coordinates and
viewing geoid model 49 observations, recomputation 509
Properties window 172, 386 of component (NE,e,h),
assigning styles to points and recomputation 489
lines 425 of coordinates 116
azimuth observations 199 of observed points, determining 510
entering coordinates 182 of points for importing 67
entering feature codes 314, 315 selecting points by 156
geoid indicator 180 queries
layers, selecting 322 selecting entities 166
opening 173 QuickPlan. See Trimble QuickPlan
opening Summary page 180
pages 175
pages for conventional observations R
in 194, 197 Real Time Kinematic (RTK) base position
pages for GPS observations in 192 recomputation 511
pages for points in 178 recomputations
parts of 173 adjusted quality 179, 490
point descriptions, viewing 436 calculating position of points 505
point details 176 control quality 179, 490
point details, survey 177 criteria for determining calculated
Stakeout page 187 position 489
properties, attributes 441 default elevation 513
determining calculated positions for
points 485
determining observations to be
used. 206

30 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

determining positions for GPS settings 32


observations 494 status of coordinates 489
determining quality of observed survey quality 179, 490
points 510 tolerance distance 505
direction of GPS baselines 495 traverse points 508
example 500 unknown quality 179, 490
fixed control quality 179 warning flags 513
flowchart 485 recomputations, distance 33
GPS site calibration 512 Recompute icon, in the status bar 14
horizontal and vertical component Recompute Report 206, 484, 513
qualities 509 Errors and Warnings section 515
keyed in coordinates and import reports 137
observations 509 parts of 514
keyed-in coordinates and Point Derivations section 516
observations, quality 509 Project Details section 515
keyed-in coordinates, quality 488 Traverse Report section 519
mapping quality 179, 490 Recompute Report, Survey Data section 520
meaning position of sideshot recomputing
points 504 overview 484
more than one set of keyed-in records
coordinates 489 duplicating 411, 412
moving points 512 user-defined 416, 419
multiple observations and reduced observations 191
coordinates 502 viewing details of 175, 200
multiple observations and meaning release notes xvii, xxi
coordinates 504 renaming
multiple observations to sideshot duplicate points
points 503 report formats
multiple sideshot observations 33 Also see custom reports
performing 14, 207, 484 reports
potential starting points, Also see custom reports
determining 487 Also see Point Derivation Report
potential starting points, position and Also see system-generated report
quality of 488 additional 359
quality hierarchy 490 creating 358
quality hierarchy table 492 Design Points /= As Staked
quality of component 489 report 361
reversing GPS baselines 208 header 358
RTK base positions 511 header, changing information 27
seeding coordinates 495 import 73, 136

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 303


Index

imported files 73, 136 S


Inverse.html 216
Level report 362 saving
links in 363 .fcl files 427, 443
Loop Closure. See Loop Closure a template 38
Report selection sets 168
modifying 359 symbols, new 422
point derivation details following scale factor 57, 227
warning message 203 horizontal adjustment 233
Points 359 Scale factor only, coordinate system 54
Stakeout report 360 importing a .dc file 54
Reports folder 32, 317, 320 scale factor, ground 61
Residual Differences Between GPS And scale, plot 329
Known Coordinates section, Calibration SDMS, export format 369
Report 238 SDR files, export format 369
residuals SDRMap coordinates, export format 369
maximum horizontal 233 sea level
maximum vertical 233 elevations 224
RINEX file format 129 sea level corrections 54
RINEX files 129 changing for terrestrial data 33
Also see Trimble Convert to RINEX sea level, mean 42
utility 458 seeding coordinates, recomputation 495
importing 129 selected entities
RMS, high color of 149
warning message, viewing 178 selecting
rotation .fcl files 381, 382
of symbols 329 a template for a project 36
rotation of files 150 calibration components 224
rotations 227 calibration point pairs 229, 230
Rover Occupation page, for GPS calibration points 163
observations 193 coordinate systems 28, 40, 43, 45,
RTK Continuous vectors 411
color of 149 coordinate systems and zones 47
RTK GPS baselines coordinate systems from the .csd
color of 149 file 45
direction of 207 coordinate systems in .dc files 52
viewing details 191 duplicate points 161
entities 140
entities in specified layers 164
entities using queries 166
entities with the mouse 152

30 4 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

entities, all 152 setting up


entities, in layers 324 projects 23
entities, in the Plan view 163 projects for attributes 381, 388
entities, methods 151 projects for attributes, .ddf files 385
flagged observations 14 projects for features 30
geoid model 43 settings
GPS observations by baseline recomputations 32
precision 160 shortcut menus 21
layer 322 shortcuts, in project bar
observations 158 New Project 24
observations, from or to a specified Open Project 26
point 159 site calibrations, GPS. See GPS site
point styles 437 calibrations
points 153 site definitions
points by antenna height 157 adding 411
points by GPS quality 156 editing 411
points by name 154 sites
points by name, rules for 155 changing geoid model 44
points to report 391, 395 details, viewing 52
recently-used coordinate systems 50 saving coordinate systems as 58
sites 51 selecting 51
sites as coordinate systems 51 selecting as coordinate systems 51
staked points 162 Sokkia SDR data collectors
symbols 428 viewing and editing files of 444
unit values and format 29 stake class, points 115
using wildcards to select multiple Stakeout report 360
point names 165 STAR*NET 2D control points, export
selection methods 140 formats 369
selection set STAR*NET 3D control points, export
feature code processing 316, 317 formats 369
selection sets 168 STAR*NET observations, export
created on import 70, 125 formats 369
importing data files 169 starting points
saved, retrieving 169 potential, determining for
saving 168 recomputations
viewing 114, 125 potential, position and quality of 488
separations, geoid 86 starting, Trimble Geomatics Office
separators, between attributes 439 software 10
sets, selection. See selection sets Static baselines
direction of 207

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 305


Index

static baselines Survey Controller (*.dc) files, importing


viewing details 191 from computer to project 110
static data 126 from computer to project, drag-and-
stations drop 109
color of 149 from the Trimble Survey Controller
status (enabled/disabled) software 106
of coordinates, recomputation 489 into the Trimble Geomatics Office
status bar 14 software 106
icons in 14 messages and dialogs that appear 112
styles, CAD. See CAD styles survey data
subgridding editing 206
.ggf files 83 source types 185
Summary page, Properties window viewing 146, 175
for conventional observations 195, Survey Data Management System See
197 SDMS
for GPS observations 192 Survey Data section, Recompute Report 520
for laser rangefinder observations 198 survey quality
for points 178 recomputation 179, 490
for reduced observations 200, 201 Survey view 10, 15
opening 180 on opening a project 26
WGS-84 points 179 symbol files 422
Summary, Calibration Report 238 as system library files 422, 423
Survey Controller (*.dc) files 45, 106, 444 symbols 423
avoiding errors by transferring 80 adding to .sym file 437
containing attributes, importing 384 blocks for 371
coordinate systems 40 color of 329, 429
editing 444 creating 420, 421, 423
formatting of files to be created 80 creating, example 421
importing 52 drawing 421
importing attributes 381 editing 420
importing with a Scale factor-only orientation of 329, 430
coordinate system 54 saving new 422
locating 445 selecting 428
selecting coordinate systems from 52 size 429
setting up project for attributes 444 size of 329
transferring to projects 314, 316 symbols, point. See point symbols
version of Trimble Survey Controller symbols, predefined 427
software to transfer to 78 Symbols.dxf files 371
viewing 444 Symbols.sym. See feature and attribute
libraries, default

30 6 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

system field codes 473 collecting 426


system library files terrestrial setup, from or to the point 178
symbol files 422, 423 text
system-generated reports Also see entities
<filename>.html 384 adding to a project 352
Calibration 235 in project, orientation of 353
Calibration, sections of 235 viewing properties of 354
choosing how you are notified of 31 text styles
choosing the way you are Also see CAD styles
notified 319 selecting for annotations 333
feature code-processing report text, associated with entities. See annotations
(FCpro.html) 317, 319 text, attributes 439
GPS Baseline Processing Report 17 text, color of 149
informing of errors 32 text, entity
locating and opening 320 viewing details 220
Network Adjustment 18 time, attributes 439
Timeline window 17
tolerance checking 33
T tolerance distance, recomputation 505
tolerance values 33
tables toolbars
in the database 382 Ellipse Controls 18
Target Setup page, for conventional tools
observations 195 Arc 421
templates drawing 421
annotation. See annotation templates for data analysis 214
creating 36, 37 Layer Selection 322
for a project 36, 40 Line 421
opening 38 New Project 24
project, defining CAD styles 327 Open Project 26
saving 38 zoom 13, 85, 141
selecting for a project 36 ToolTips 21
templates, for a project 24 TPLANE, export format 369
TERRAMODEL, export format 369 transferring
terrestrial data .cdg files 89
changing sea level correction for 33 .dc files to projects 314, 316
terrestrial observations .dc files, avoiding errors by 80
color of 149 .ddf files 98
using for a recomputation 206 .dtx files 99
terrestrial positions

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 307


Index

.fcl files to Trimble Survey Controller files


software 96, 314, 383, 443 creating conversion 464
.ggf files 83 input 456
Antenna files 101 output 455, 458
data to devices 401 types 455
files to the Trimble Survey Controller Header Field Override dialog 462
software 78 selecting
Survey Controller (*.dc) files 80 folders and files 456
transferring files input files 456
to the Trimble Survey Controller output folder 457
software 79 Trimble Coordinate System Manager utility
to the Trimble Survey Controller .csd 411
software, how to 79 coordinate system groups 417
transformations, plane 227 coordinate systems 411
translations 227 adding 417
Transverse Mercator projection, default 40, adding to .csd file 417
45, 55, 226 creating 411
creating projects 54 duplicating 417
defining 56 editing 417
selecting geoid models 44 datum transformations
undefined 53 adding 414
updating origin 227 creating 411
traverse points ellipsoids
more than one observation, adding 413
recomputation 508 creating 412
Traverse Report section geoid models for coordinate systems,
Recompute Report 519 choosing 419
traverses records
entering for a point 343 duplicating 411
Trimble Convert to RINEX utility records, ellipsoid
Configuration dialog 457 editing 411
configuring records, user-defined 416, 419
antenna information 459 viewing .csd 41
controls 463 Trimble Data Exchange Format 369
header information 461 Trimble Data Transfer
output files 458 devices
the RINEX conversion 457 deleting 409
creating conversion file 464 managing 409
defining header fields 461 viewing properties of 409
editing antenna information 460 GPS receiver device setting up 405

30 8 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

setting up devices 402 feature and attribute libraries


transferring creating, example 426
data to devices 401 editing 425
Trimble Survey Controller device processing 423
setting up 403 saving 427, 443
types of devices 402 transferring to Trimble Survey
Trimble Data Transfer utility 401 Controller software 443
Trimble DC File Editor utility 444 viewing 425
.dc files 444 feature code processing, .fcl files 427
editing 444 Feature Code Properties dialog,
locating 445 Attributes tab 440
viewing 444, 445 feature codes 426, 427
Sokkia SDR data collectors, viewing creating 427, 434
and editing files of 444 descriptions of 434
Trimble DC File Editor window 445 layers for 437
Trimble Feature and Attribute Editor layers
utility 425 creating 326
Annotation Template-Properties line styles 426, 427
Dialog 432 creating 423, 431
annotation templates 426 line types, predefined 427
creating 336, 426, 431 point descriptions, viewing 436
for lines and arcs 434 point styles 426, 427
for points example 431 creating 423, 426, 427
from feature code defining settings for 428
processing 431 selecting 437
predefined 431 point styles, size 429
specifying layers for 432 projects, setting up for attributes 427
viewing, how to 431 separators, between attributes 439
annotations, position of 433 symbol files, as system library
attributes files 422, 423
creating 426 symbols
defining sets to collect 438 adding to .sym file 437
attributes, properties 441 creating 423
attributes, types of 439 selecting 428
CAD styles symbols, orientation of 430
creating 331 symbols, predefined 427
color settings 429 symbols, size 429
control codes 426 Trimble Geomatics Office software,
assigning to points 442 linking 426
creating 427, 442 using, example 426

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 309


Index

when and why to use 425 transferring 80


Trimble GDM, export format 368 Trimble Survey Controller device
Trimble Geomatics Office software Also see devices
exiting 22 setting up 403
folder structure 7 Trimble Survey Controller software
getting started 6 collecting attributes 383
key features 2 exporting .ddf files 385
overview 2 exporting .fcl files to 383
starting 10 importing .dc files from 106
using 3 PC card 401
workflow 4 transferring .fcl files 383
Trimble Geomatics Office window 1014 transferring .fcl files to 96, 315
Also see project bar 12 transferring Antenna files to 101
Also see status bar 14 transferring files to 78
Also see zoom navigator 13 transferring Geoid Grid (*.ggf) files
Trimble GPS receiver 401 to 88
importing .dat files from 119 versions to transfer files to 78
Trimble Grid Factory utility Trimble Symbol Editor utility 420
.ggf, creating 467 drawing
installing, how to 467 size 421
viewing geoid separations 42 tools 421
Trimble Line Type Editor utility 420 drawing palette 421
line styles, defining 420 point styles
line types 420 assigning to points 420
editing 420 point symbols 420
projects, changing .fcl files 424 projects, changing libraries 424
Trimble Pathfinder Office software 98 symbol file 422
Trimble QuickPlan symbols
almanac, current ephemeris file 447 creating 420, 421
creating sessions and defining creating, example 421
points 448 drawing 421
defining a point 450 editing 420
defining the session 449 saving new 422
displaying graphs 454 tools
exiting 455 Arc 421
setting Auto Time parameters 452 Line 421
viewing reports 453 TRIMMAP
viewing the Status Window 451 .fcl files 315
when and why use 446 TRIMMAP files 366
Trimble Survey Controller (*.dc) files TRIMMAP, export format 369

31 0 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Index

U V
UK National Grid values
version of Trimble Survey Controller laser rangefinder observations 198
software to transfer to 78 tolerance 33
undefined default Transverse Mercator vectors, GPS. See GPS baselines
projection 53 vertical adjustment
unit values computing 228
selecting 29 including 228
units of measurement maximum inclination 233
for distance 342 parameters for 228
unknown quality Vertical Adjustment Parameters section,
recomputation 179, 490 Calibration Report 237
Updated Default Projection (Transverse vertical adjustment, GPS site calibration 51
Mercator) Definition section, Calibration vertical components, quality for
Report 236 recomputation 509
Utilities vertical control point
QuickPlan 446 color of 150
utilities 400 vertical residual, maximum 233
A1 Viewer. See Trimble A1 Viewer vertical shift parameters 228
utility 465 view
Convert to RINEX. See Trimble annotation details 222
Convert to RINEX utility 455 properties of text 354
Coordinate System Manager. See view filters 143
Trimble Coordinate System changing 145
Manager editing 14
Data Transfer. See Trimble Data View Filters icon, in the status bar 14
Transfer utility viewing
DC File Editor. See .csd 41
<DefaultParaFont>Trimble DC .dc files 444, 445
File Editor utility .fcl files 425
Feature and Attribute Editor. See annotation templates, how to 332,
Trimble Feature and Attribute 431
Editor attributes 386
Feature and Attribute Editor. See CAD details of a point 188
Trimble Feature and Attribute CAD styles 331
Editor utility coordinate system details 44, 48, 239
Grid Factory. See Trimble Grid coordinate systems 28
Factory utility 467 entities 173
utilities, Help 400 erroneous data 202
utilities, opening 400

Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1 311


Index

geoid model properties 49, 58 warning messages 53, 204, 384


geoid separations 42 viewing 178, 192, 200, 202
GPS observation details 192 Warning page, for GPS observations 192,
grid lines 147 200
linework entities 219 Warning page, for points 178
note records 218 WAVE Baseline Processing module 17
observations 14 opening a project created with 26
observations and coordinates used for WAVE GPS baseline processing module
points 178 RINEX files 129
observations, details 175, 191 WAVE processing styles 17
Point Derivation Report 180 WGS-84
point descriptions 436 ellipsoid 86
point details 175, 176 heights 224
point details, survey 177 points, relationship with grid
point qualities 178 points 224
points 14 WGS-84 points, in Summary page of
reduced observation details Properties window 179
selection sets 114, 125 wildcards
selection sets created on import 70 # 165
site details 52 * 165
survey data 146, 175 ? 165
text entity details 220 selecting multiple point names 165
warning messages 178, 202 WILDsoft, export format 369
viewing, properties window
of lines 347 graphics 1014
viewing, properties of Properties 172
annotations 355 Trimble Geomatics Office 1014
arcs 350 World files 150
curves 351 world wide web site xv, xix
linework 346
views
Plan 10, 19 Z
Survey 10, 15
switching between Plan and Zeiss Rec E/M5, export format 369
Survey 10 zoom navigator 13
showing or hiding 13
using 13
using a mouse with a wheel 13
W
zoom tools 13, 85, 141
warning flags 202
warning flags, recomputation 513

31 2 Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1


Reader Comment Form
Trimble Geomatics Office User Guide Volume 1
January 2001 Part Number 39328-10-ENG Revision A

We appreciate your comments and suggestions for improving this publication.

I use the following Trimble product______________________________________________


for ________________________________________________________________________
Please circle a response for each of the statements below:
1 = Strongly Agree 2 = Agree 3 = Neutral 4 = Disagree 5 = Strongly Disagree
The manual is well organized. 1 2 3 4 5
I can find the information I want. 1 2 3 4 5
The information in the manual is accurate. 1 2 3 4 5
I can easily understand the instructions. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual contains enough examples. 1 2 3 4 5
The examples are appropriate and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The layout and format are attractive and useful. 1 2 3 4 5
The illustrations are clear and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual is: too long just right too short
Please answer the following questions:
Which sections do you use the most? ____________________________________________
What do you like best about the manual? _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
What do you like least about the manual? _________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Optional
Name _____________________________________________________________________
Company __________________________________________________________________
Address____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
Telephone ____________________________ Fax ____________________________________

Please mail to the local office listed on the back cover or to Trimble Navigation Limited, 645
North Mary Avenue, P.O. Box 3642, Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642. Alternatively, e-mail your
comments and suggestions to ReaderFeedback@trimble.com. All comments and suggestions
become the property of Trimble Navigation Limited.

Anda mungkin juga menyukai